JP7353571B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Slot machines have been known as one type of gaming machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-214434

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance of a gaming machine.

The present invention
A game media input port;
Detection means A, detection means B, and detection means C are provided in a passage through which game media input from the game medium input port pass, and are capable of detecting game media (detection means B is located downstream of detection means A). , and the detection means C is located downstream from the detection means B),
A detecting means is movable between a position where the passage of the game medium is permitted and a position where the passage of the game medium is not permitted, and is provided in a passage through which the game medium input from the game medium input port passes. a blocker located downstream from A and upstream from detection means B;
As a game section, it has a first section and a second section,
In the first section, the predetermined gaming state is not reached,
In the second section, there may be a predetermined gaming state,
A predetermined storage means capable of storing a value related to the number of games played in the second section and a value related to the total number of differences in the second section,
In a predetermined game in the second section, the value related to the number of games stored in the predetermined storage means can be updated based on the execution of the game, and the number of games stored in the predetermined storage means is made based on the execution of the game. after updating the value related to the total difference stored in the predetermined storage means based on the number of game media awarded in a predetermined game and the number of bets on the game media in the predetermined game,
If the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed in a specific game in the second section, whether or not the value related to the number of games in the second section stored in the updated predetermined storage means satisfies the first specific condition. If the first specific condition is satisfied, the value related to the total number of differences in the second section is not judged as to whether it satisfies the second specific condition, but is stored in the updated predetermined storage means. If the value related to the number of games played in the second section does not satisfy the first specific condition, the value related to the total number of differences stored in the predetermined storage means is not updated, but the value related to the total number of differences in the second section is not updated. A judgment is made as to whether or not the second specific condition is met;
If the value related to the number of games played in the second section satisfies the first specific condition, the second section can be terminated, and if the value related to the total number of differences in the second section satisfies the second specific condition, the second section is terminated. possible,
When an event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, the power cutoff process can be executed.
In the power-off process, a process is executed to set the blocker to a position where passage of the game medium is not permitted, and after executing the process, other processes including a checksum calculation process are executed,
In a situation where the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value less than the upper limit of the number of credits), when gaming media is inserted from the gaming media slot, the game When the detection status of the detection means B and the detection means C for the medium satisfies a predetermined condition, "1" can be added to the number of credits,
When the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value less than the upper limit of the number of credits), when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off, the power supply Designing the period until detecting an event in which the supply is cut off, executing processing to set the blocker to a position where passage of gaming media is not permitted through power-off processing, and disallowing passage of gaming media. Let the value be T1,
In a situation where the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value less than the upper limit of the number of credits), when gaming media is inserted from the gaming media slot, the game The design value of the period from the time when the medium reaches the position where it is detected by the detection means A until the time when the said game medium reaches the position where it is detected by the detection means B is set as T2 ,
In a situation where the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value less than the upper limit of the number of credits), when gaming media is inserted from the gaming media slot, the game The period from the time when the detection means B detects the medium to the time after the detection means C detects the game medium and the time when the detection means B no longer detects the game medium and the time when the detection means C no longer detects the game medium. When the design value is T3,
T1<T2
T1<T3
It is characterized by the following.
Further, in a modified example of the present invention, the above-mentioned problem is solved by the following solving means (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). Note that the invention according to the original claim of the present application corresponds to original invention 13 among original inventions 1 to 14 described later.
The present invention (11th embodiment)
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
a difference counter that stores the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), with the minimum value being "0";
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. At least in a game in which a small prize has been won, after all the reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ( Step S424 in FIG. 51 or 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). Enables execution of the process for ending (step S435),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the update process of the difference counter (steps S428 and W429) is executed. After that, it is determined whether the value of the difference counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (step S434), and when it is determined that the value is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" at step S434). ''), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed,
2. In a game in which the replay is won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (see FIG. 51). or step S424 in FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference counter is not determined (step S434). processing for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) without executing the processing),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the difference counter is updated without executing the update process of the difference counter. It is determined whether the value of is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if "Yes" in step S426, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section is determined. When it is determined that this is the case ("Yes" in step S434), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) is enabled.

According to the present invention, the performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

1 is a block diagram schematically showing control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in the present embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view illustrating how medals inserted from the medal slot pass through the insertion sensor in the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when a power outage occurs in the first embodiment (A) using a time chart. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of medals in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating on/off of the input sensor using a time chart in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram when medals are ejected from the medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing how the payout sensor is turned on (detected)/off (non-detected) when medals are sent out from the medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). In the first embodiment (C), it is a diagram showing on/off of the payout sensor in a time chart. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a main control board and a board case in a second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case housing a main control board. (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA, showing example 1 of the gate trace. (c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA, showing example 2 of the gate trace. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the flow of processing when a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board in the third embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is a sectional view (schematic diagram) explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, and (b) shows when the detection sensor is turned on from off. (c) shows the state in which the stop button is pressed to the deepest position, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released from being pressed and the detection sensor changes from on to off. FIG. 7 is a time chart showing the relationship between the movement of a stop button and the excitation state of a motor in the fourth embodiment, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. In the fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between power on/off and voltage level, (a) shows power off after main program startup, and (b) shows power off before main program startup. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing the state before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed shaft and the movable shaft. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing a state in which the hopper disk has rotated more advanced than in (a) before coming into contact with the movable shaft; In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device that is moved by being pushed by the last ejected medal. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the shaft has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state at the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device after ejecting the last ejected medal. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the drive signal of a hopper motor, the drive state of a hopper motor, and the discharge situation of medals from a discharge part in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation|movement of the main control board, the driving state of a hopper motor, the detection state of a payout sensor, and the discharge timing of a medal in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a side sectional view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub-control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. In the seventh embodiment, when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed, it is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board, (c ) shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. FIG. 22 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front part of the housing of the slot machine (section A in FIG. 22) with the front door closed in the eighth embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the gap between the cabinet and the front door. be. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special combinations (accessories) and end conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state, (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used commonly by non-RT and RT (non-AT) in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used both in RB inside and BB inside in a 9th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the test pattern display of management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the test pattern display of management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LED, and (C) is a diagram showing setting value display LED. It is. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. It is a figure which shows the output port in 11th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal. Further, (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, names, etc. of data stored in RWM. 2A and 2B are diagrams illustrating the concept of a difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between a difference counter value and an advantageous section, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. It is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. 38. This is a flowchart showing the power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. 38. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in an 11th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41. This is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transfer lottery process in step S283 in FIG. 41. 45 is a flowchart showing advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG. 44. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. 45. FIG. This is a flowchart showing the AT initial number of games determination process in step S363 in FIG. 46. 42 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41. This is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) due to winning in step S294 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; 51 is a flowchart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR). 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53. FIG. This is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453 in FIG. 53. 11 is a flowchart showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. 57 is a flowchart showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 56. In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the accessory condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the specified number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view showing an outline of a composition including a reel and a stop switch in a 13th embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“Bet” refers to betting medals (gaming media) in order to play a game. To bet medals, the player either inserts actual medals through the medal slot 47, or operates the bet switch 40 to bet credited (accumulated) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "storage")" is different from the above-mentioned "bet" and refers to the storage of medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, "credit" is used in a meaning that does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "insertion" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Further, the "regular number" refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game where the specified number is "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the number of bets "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the number of bets "1".
Note that for convenience of explanation, the "prescribed number" may be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "specified number." For example, in a game with a specified number of "2" or "3", when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the bet number is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Care" means that the player inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (described later).
"Care bet" means that the player bets on medals by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.
"Care credit" means that the player credits the medals (adds credits) by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.
“Bet medal” refers to a medal that has been bet on.
"Reserved medals" refer to medals that have been credited (reserved).

A "storage bet" is a bet by which a player operates the bet switch 40 (described later) to place a part or all of the credited medals within the bettable range for the game in order to play the game. It means to do something.
"Automatic bet" refers to automatically betting the number of medals bet in the previous game by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when a replay wins.
Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that it has stopped on the active line; the same applies hereinafter) is referred to as "winning a small winning combination". On the other hand, the "Regulations Concerning Certification and Type Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" states that when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is displayed in a stopped state, a conditional device related to replay is activated. This is interpreted as not "winning". However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replays are also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combinations), and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying may be referred to as "replay winning."
“Settlement” refers to paying out bet medals and/or stored medals to the player. In this embodiment, the payment process is executed when the payment switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to paying out medals to the player based on the winning combination, or paying out medals based on the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out medals to a player based on a winning combination, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)), and paying out. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled so that, for example, "50" medals are credited as a limit number, and medals in excess of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "granting." Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants."

The "gaming medium" is a medal in this embodiment, but in the case of an enclosed type (ECO) gaming machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the gaming medium. Furthermore, "electronic information" refers to, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of that electronic information can be used to play a game on a gaming machine. Credit can be placed on a gaming machine as gaming media for playing games.
Note that "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

Furthermore, when the game medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from the hopper 35 (described later), but also crediting electronic information for the payout corresponding to the winning combination to the game media credit device ( It also includes processing for adding (addition).

When the game progresses from "N-1" game, "N" game, "N+1" game, etc. ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When the number is ``N'', the game with the ``N'' game is called the ``current game''. In addition, the "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a numerical value with "(B)" appended to the end of the number (especially 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, numbers with "(H)" appended to the end of the numbers mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal notation is written as "00010000 (B)" in binary notation, and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal notation. In addition, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is written as "16 (D)" if necessary.
However, if it is clear whether it is a binary number, decimal number, or hexadecimal number, the final symbols of "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted, respectively. .

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on the active line).
In addition, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to a game that has a payout or a large number of payouts in a game where the game result (symbol combination that stops on an active line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Refers to an operation mode in which a symbol combination is stopped, a symbol combination that moves to an advantageous RT (promotion) is stopped, or a symbol combination that does not shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT stops. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

"Games in which the game results are advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" are, for example, games in which one of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. This corresponds to the winning game). Although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which multiple types of replays are won (double replay wins; games in which the so-called "push order replay" is won), the RT changes depending on the type of winning replay. This also applies to cases where

The "instruction function" means a function that instructs the player how to operate the stop switch 42. The instruction function is, in principle, a function for instructing the player on an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
Note that "display" means to visually show the contents of the "instruction", and "notification" means to notify the player of the contents of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function."

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "activation of the instruction function," but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "instruction function activation." It may also be referred to as "operation".
For example, if the pressing order bells shown in winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. However, instead of this, it is assumed that depending on the order of pressing, there will be either 1, 3, 4, 10, or a missed prize (non-winning).
Here, notifying the pressing order for winning a 10-card combination is notifying an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "operation of an instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the pressing order for winning a 1-card, 3-card, or 4-card winning combination may be referred to as "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of an instruction function)" or "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notice of".

The pressing order for winning a 4-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of payouts is "4" for the number of bets "3", and the difference in the number of coins for the game is "+1", this is an operation mode that increases the difference in number of coins, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pressing order for winning a 3-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "3", and the difference number is maintained as it is (does not decrease the difference number), this is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation state.

Furthermore, similarly, the pressing order for winning a 1-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. Furthermore, this is an operation mode in which the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets "3", reducing the difference in the number of coins. However, since it can be said to be an operating mode that does not leave out any winnings, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operating mode.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated to notify the operation mode (correct answer push order) in which the combination with the largest number of payouts wins.
However, for example, if the difference counter value (described later) during the advantageous section approaches the upper limit (2400 (D)), but there is still room in the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later). It is conceivable that when the push order bell is won, the push order for winning a 3-card winning combination or a 4-card winning combination is notified as described above, and the difference counter value is controlled so as to maintain the current status.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one prescribed number. For example, assume that the specified number of instruction functions to be activated is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" during AT, when the game is started with a bet number of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number "2", the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "gaming section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section." In addition, the No. 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a gaming section that won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous section), but under the current No. 6 machine rules, the "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" refers to signals related to the instruction function, specifically the press order instruction number and winning/replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct press order), which will be described later, on the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ), and refers to a game period that does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of winning combinations, it is also possible to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section (by lottery, etc.).

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function Since the signal related to this is not transmitted to the peripheral board, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section that has the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section where the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a game section where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (or may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that is contrary to the instruction content given by the main control board 60 or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Moreover, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is no need to activate the instruction function.
On the other hand, during the advantageous period, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may be always operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification gaming state) is a gaming state in which the operating mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game where the gaming result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operating mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, AT is always during the advantageous section and is never performed during the non-advantageous section.

Further, in a game where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage/disadvantage in the game result, the AT may always (100%) notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42, but the AT may also notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a predetermined period. In order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules, it is conceivable not to notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even if the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
For example, if the difference counter approaches the upper limit value during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 will not be notified temporarily in order to prolong the life of AT. (not activating the instruction function) is also conceivable.

Furthermore, various settings can be made regarding the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first option is to set "advantageous section=AT". In this case, winning in the advantageous section and winning in AT are equivalent. Then, AT starts from the first game in the advantageous section. Further, AT ends at the end of the advantageous section.

A second method is to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, simply moving to an advantageous section will not satisfy the AT start (execution) conditions, and on the condition that it is in an advantageous section, whether or not to execute AT is determined by lottery etc. When it is decided to execute the AT, the AT may be executed until a predetermined termination condition for the AT is satisfied. In addition, if it is non-AT when moving to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to the normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (period where it is easy to win AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a precursor after transitioning to an advantageous section, the transition may be made to the actual precursor, and after a predetermined number of games of the actual precursor are completed, the transition may be made to AT. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous section or after a transition to an advantageous section, it may be decided by lottery whether to use a real omen or a false omen, and if it is determined to be a real omen, the transition to AT may be made after the main omen ends. . Further, when it is determined that the false sign is false, the advantageous zone may be maintained after the false sign ends, or the advantageous zone may be shifted to the normal zone.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, if the AT ends but the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not met, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, when starting the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, a lottery etc. related to the advantageous section is not executed.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous section, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, a decision (by lottery, etc.) is made as to whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section. This can be mentioned.
Furthermore, when a predetermined end condition is set for an advantageous section, and the predetermined end condition for an advantageous section is met, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or the remaining number of games in AT) is reached, at that point One example is to end the advantageous section at .

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous section means that the difference counter value described later exceeds "2400 (D)" or that the advantageous section clear counter (number of games played during the advantageous section) described later is " 1500 (D)''. When any of these conditions is met, it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous section, or may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" includes, for example, a case where the instruction function is activated in a gaming state in which the game is in an advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1". Note that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.

In addition, "Section Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even when winning the "PB ≠ 1" combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed). If there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high bell that will give the maximum payout) will be selected. This is the ball payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. In calculating the section Sim ball payout rate, the balls (number of payouts) due to accessory actions (1BB action, etc.) are not included. In addition, in a game that won a replay, if the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts will be counted as "0", and in a replay based on a winning replay (the next game of the game that won a replay), the number of bets will be counted as "0". It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts as "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for games that win replays and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "gaming state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds 1" includes RT and main game states in which the section Sim ball payout rate is set to exceed "1."
Here, examples of RTs in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" include RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Furthermore, assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback sections, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, the main game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1" is AT.

When ending the advantageous section, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous section, for example, during the game end check process described later, or during the game start setting process for the next game of the last game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. do. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing by executing an initialization process for the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

The "processing related to advantageous sections" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Advantageous section (transition) lottery 2) Update of advantageous section clear counter (subtraction, clear)
3) Update the difference counter (calculation, clear)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Further, the "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of game number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the number of remaining games reaches "0"), update the AT game number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)
4) In the case of differential number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the remaining differential number becomes "0"), update the AT differential number counter (subtraction, addition, clear)

According to the current rules, it is stipulated that both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one gaming state (RT) in one prescribed number, except for the following. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the specified number is "3", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function can be executed, and when the specified number is "2", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed. And so.
However, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to update the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, regardless of the specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the winning combination result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIG. 26 or FIG. 58, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is determined that processing related to advantageous sections (advantageous section transition lottery) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process related to the advantageous section may be executed even if the lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result is non-winning, if the probability of non-winning is more than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low; for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function is applied. The process (AT lottery process) is made executable.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to advantageous sections), if the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, the next game will be in the advantageous section. Therefore, in a game in which an advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to an advantageous section) is executed and the player wins in an advantageous section, it is not possible to perform notification of the correct answer pressing order (processing related to the instruction function).
However, there is no problem in performing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific winning combination lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous section and AT (without executing a lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display device") 74 consists of four LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. It is composed of an LED that displays which item it is among the items using a predetermined symbol, etc., and a two-digit ratio segment (LED that displays the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) (7U.) or designated accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous role ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Accessory ratio (cumulative total) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting is continued until the number of games has reached at least "175,000". When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" the number of games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a blinking display, and when it is more than "175,000" number of games, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a lighting display. Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", it continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets, where one set is "400" times.

The "advantageous section ratio" refers to the ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section to all gaming sections (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section between them is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Furthermore, the "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In addition, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction included accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function was activated" is determined based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the activation of the instruction function, for example, the winning number " When 10 bells from 3 to 8 are won, 10 is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.
On the other hand, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if one bell is won in the example of FIG. 58 because the stop switch 42 is pressed in a different order from the displayed order, the instruction-included accessory counter ``1'' is added to .
Similarly, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 was pressed in a different order from the displayed pressing order, the instruction-included accessory counter is not added to. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the pressing order bell is won, and the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is pressed. There are cases where forward instruction information (dummy) is displayed and cases where the instruction function is not activated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts for the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct pressing order using images or sounds.

"Continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation relative to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts in ``6000'' number of games is ``2000 pieces'', and the number of payouts when the ``Class 1 special bonus (RB)'' is activated is ``500 pieces'', then The ratio (6000 games) is 25 (%).

Moreover, the "accessory object ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts. Here, the term "accessory object" refers to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory, as well as second-class special accessory (CB), also referred to as MB (2BB). Second-class accessory continuous operating device. CB ), SB (single bonus) is included.
In addition, in the above five items, if a gaming machine is not equipped with a function corresponding to that item, the ratio segment is displayed as "--" by lighting up.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when displaying ratio display numbers "2" and "4", the ratio segment is set to "--" ” is displayed.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. do.

Further, the rules stipulate that the advantageous section ratio and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio should be 70% or less. It is also stated that the ratio of accessories should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the ratio of consecutive accessories should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a gaming machine with a specification in which the advantageous section ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a gaming machine with a specification in which the instruction-included accessory ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. A gaming machine with an advantageous section is either of the "7U" type or the "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections must be 70% or less, but in the "7P" type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is It is sufficient to make it 70% or less of the number of payouts, and for example, the entire period or most of the game period may be an advantageous period.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, the settings should be set so that there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section lottery, and the setting should be set so that the probability of winning the advantageous section lottery is approximately 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set to have a high probability (for example, 70%) of winning the advantageous section lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery) by referring to the setting value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to the instruction function by referring to the setting value itself. Is possible.
In the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, most of the interior of BB2 is in the advantageous section, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform AT during this advantageous section.

Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of a slot machine (player type gaming machine). Then, the base value in real time (during measurement) for each ``60,000'' out balls (``base value'' indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls), and the ``60,000 out balls''. ” The base values of the first, second, and third base values are displayed sequentially for each item. For example, the real-time base value identification segment is displayed as "bL.", the previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b1.", and the two previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b2." and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing the control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in this embodiment. This embodiment consists of the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
Typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it includes only those shown in FIG. 1). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral equipment for playing the game, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection section into which signals from operating switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection section through which signals are sent to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, peripheral devices for input are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the peripheral devices toward the main control board 50, and peripheral devices for output are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for playing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC with a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game, and specifically, performs lottery of winning combinations, reel 31 The controller controls the drive and pays out when winning a prize.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and registers is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
Note that an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are sent into the medal selector.
Note that the movement of the medals inserted from the medal slot 47 within the medal selector will be explained later with reference to FIG. 2 and the like.
As shown in FIG. 1, inside the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an input sensor 44 (a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b) are provided (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for allowing/disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, it forms a medal passageway through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are returned from the payout opening. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector (an opening leading to the medal return port) to form a medal passage for guiding the medals to the hopper 35 side. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 disables the insertion of medals during the game (from when the reels 31 start rotating until all the reels 31 stop and when a winning combination ends the payout corresponding to the winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when no game is being played.

In the medal selector, an input sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the input sensor 44 is composed of a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance apart, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since a medal is detected by one input sensor 44a, the input sensor 44 is activated by the other input sensor 44b. It is configured to be detected by Then, it is determined whether or not the correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of input sensors 44 are turned on and off, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 also includes a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, and operation switches operated by the player. A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" is used to turn on/off an electric signal based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receiving external force). This refers to a device (including an electric circuit and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

When the operating switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operating switch is in the off state). Then, when a player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body thereof), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Note that, contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the operation switch is in the on state. You may.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is lever-shaped (therefore also referred to as a "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch. The operating body 43 has a push button shape (therefore, it is also referred to as a "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43"). In addition, in the fourth embodiment described later, the operating body (the part pressed by the player) of the stop switch 42 will be referred to as a "stop button 42a."

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operating switch and/or around or near the operating body. When the operation acceptance of the operation switch is permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation reception of the operation switch is not permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch is emitted in blue. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/disapproval state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the stop switches 42 can be operated, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that they can be operated. Shown below. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. Thereafter, the remaining stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 that has been controlled to stop has finished, and when the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 (the fourth embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. Although the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not been operated yet are still emitting red light, they are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. This embodiment includes a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (maximum number, specified number).
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

Note that the prescribed number is predetermined, for example, depending on when the accessory is not activated/when it is activated. Specifically, the number is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when 1BB is activated, and 2 when 2BB is activated, etc. By operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, it is possible to insert two medals, and by operating it three times, it is possible to insert three medals. Also, when the specified number is 3, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b, and when the specified number is 2, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in a state where less than the prescribed number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets becomes three.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player to stop the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals bet and/or stored (credit) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that in reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other with a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board, etc.). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

In addition, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number obtained by the player) when winning a winning combination, and, like the credit number display LED 76, it is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the obtained number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying push order instruction information (notifying an advantageous push order) in a game that notifies the push order during AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquisition number, error details, and push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
Note that during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (in this embodiment, a stepping motor) 32 of the symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, a motor 32 that drives each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (symbols forming symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (two or more indexes may be used). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has rotated once. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment the index is detected can be detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses should the (stepping) motor 32 be driven to stop the symbol at the number of symbols ahead, counting from the symbol on the reference position, on the effective line? It becomes possible to identify whether the

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal dispensing device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when dispensing medals from the hopper 35 from a dispensing port, and a dispensing motor 36 for detecting medals dispensed from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal input port 47 are stored in the hopper 35.
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. Then, when a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 7, which will be described later) is moved by the medal. The dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within a predetermined time range, it is determined whether the medals are correctly paid out.

For example, when the pair of payout sensors 37 is not detected to be on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an on signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
Note that the details of these operations will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet) or inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it performs a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and drives and controls all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control it to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to display the lottery result (internal lottery) of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed in accordance with the result determined by the means.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The winning combination lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of winning numbers. Here, the "drawing of winning numbers by the prize drawing means 61" is the same as the "internal drawing" in the Entertainment Business Law Regulations (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines and type examination, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as "Rules"). The lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the prize lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the prize condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device becomes operable in the game. In addition, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for lottery (hardware random numbers, etc.), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number extracting means based on the random number extracted by the random number extracting means. and winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal notation). The random number is a random number that continues counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle by a counter that counts once every 200n (nano) seconds, for example, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number is Continue counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table to be described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When one of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag for that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that there are two cases of winning a winning combination: a case where there is only one winning combination (single winning) and a case where there are multiple winning combinations (multiple winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number (number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61 (when the push order bell or push order replay is won). decision).
The “push order” of the press order instruction numbers selected here means a press order (correct press order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when a push order bell is won, it refers to the push order (correct answer push order) that makes the higher bell win the prize. In addition, when a replay double win occurs, it refers to the push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or the push order that does not allow the RT to fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or the push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-mentioned obtained number display LED 78 with push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically "=*"("*"=1, 2, . . .) information is displayed. In this manner, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a conditional device having an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function.
In addition, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 controls the sub control board at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it displays an image of the correct pressing order on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous interval (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. Note that in the normal section, it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number.

The performance group number selection means 64 is for selecting the performance group number corresponding to the winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Here, the performance group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game. The number is sent to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs a performance related to the winning combination based on the received performance group number. The effect group number, unlike the above-mentioned push order instruction number, is selected every game and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning numbers of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the performance group number for each game, it is possible to output the performance based on the received performance group number. However, even if the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the presentation group number, so the sub-control board 80 will not notify the correct press order based on the presentation group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Further, after the winning numbers are determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the winning flag in the current game, and generates a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the winning flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is The drive is controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, in a game where at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 enables the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are stopped so as to be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are stopped so as not to stop symbol combinations corresponding to combinations other than winning combinations (winning flags are turned off) on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reels 31" refers to the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 actually stop, or the amount of rotation of the reels 31 (number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 revolutions per minute at constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to . As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, except for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of stop control of the reels 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined active line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined valid line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol of the combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined active line, the reels 31 will be stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to be stopped on a predetermined valid line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number will stop on the active line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol combination of a combination that does not correspond to the winning number is controlled so as not to stop on the active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game where multiple winning combinations are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed and the timing at which the stop switches 42 are operated. According to a predetermined priority order, control is performed to stop the drawing of symbols related to the most prioritized winning combination.

The winning determination means 66 determines, when the reels 31 are stopped, whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 that has stopped on the active line is a symbol combination that corresponds to any winning combination.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line. Specifically, from the condition device activated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that will stop on the active line before the reel 31 actually stops is determined in advance. Or, after the reels 31 have stopped, the symbol combinations that have stopped on the active line are determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the production output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, press order instruction number (only when AT is in progress and a winning number with the correct press order is won). , performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combinations, etc.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and while waiting for the game.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) unidirectionally communicates with the sub-control board 80 through parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) necessary for output.
Note that the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to peripheral devices for effects such as the following effect lamps 21 as shown in FIG. 1 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data etc. taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the performance.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs for holding a lottery related to a performance, various data, etc. as performance data.

The effect lamps 21 are made of, for example, LEDs, and are lit in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. Note that the production lamp 21 includes a back lamp that is placed on the inner circumference side of each reel 31 and illuminates the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols visible from the display window) from behind. These include a fluorescent light that illuminates the symbols on the reels 31 from above, a frame lamp that is placed in front of the front door of the slot machine 10, and that blinks when a winning combination is won.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when predetermined conditions are met in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game, etc.). It displays game information (the number of games played and the number of coins won when the accessory is activated or during the advantageous period (AT), etc.).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing how the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 pass through the input sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram seen from the front. In FIG. 2, the inside of the medal selector is shown so as to be visible. Furthermore, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 depending on their positions. The position M1 indicates a state in which the medal M is placed in the medal placing portion 47b of the medal slot 47 (a state before being released). That is, at the position M1, when viewed from the front, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M is in contact with the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b.
In FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4, which will be described later), it is assumed that the entire substantially square portions indicated as input sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (sensor eyes) of input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively. (This is not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b.)

Further, the position M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer visible when viewed from the front. That is, the position M2 is a position where the highest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M overlaps with the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b. For example, if it is assumed that the player releases the medal M when it is at the position M1, the medal M will fall from the position M1. Therefore, at position M2, it is in a state where it has been released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
Note that the "upstream side" refers to the medal input port 47 side, and the "downstream side" refers to the input sensor 44b side (hopper 35 side). In terms of the positions of the medals M, from the upstream side to the downstream side, the order is M1→M2→M3→M4.

In the example of FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M when it is located at M2.
Furthermore, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (on) when the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a. Moreover, the position M4 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b (off).

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion where the player inserts the medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when betting or crediting the medal M as a game medium. The medal slot 47 includes a medal guard part 47a and a medal placement part 47b. The medal holder 47b has a substantially curved surface (a curvature slightly larger than the periphery of the medal M) extending perpendicularly to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of stacked medals M (up to about 10 medals) can be placed at the same time. curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a with which the medals M come into contact (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed to intersect substantially perpendicularly.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 2, the intersection of the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a has an opening through which one medal M can flow down. In a state where two medals M are piled up, the medal M does not fall from the opening, but when the thickness is the same as one medal M, the medal M is formed so as to flow down from the opening. For this reason, the player may, for example, place a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placement part 47b, press the plurality of medals M toward the medal guard part 47a, and increase the pressing force. By weakening it, it is possible to drop the medals M placed on the medal placing portion 47b one by one into the medal selector from the opening.

When a medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal slot 47, the medal M flows down the passage within the medal selector. Inside the medal selector, from the upstream side, a passage sensor 46, an input sensor 44a, and an input sensor 44b are provided. Further, the above-mentioned blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a (in FIG. 2, below the input sensor 44a).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine the presence or absence of a medal jam or a trifling act, and detects the medal M for a predetermined period of time (predetermined) from the time when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M. Furthermore, when the medal M is no longer detected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is determined that it is normal. On the other hand, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined period of time has passed after detecting the medal, it is determined that a medal retention error has occurred. Further, when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M and then stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed, it is determined that the medal M has passed illegally.

When the medal M flows down within the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side in the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the on state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is on), the blocker 45 forms a medal flow path such that the medal M can be detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has the role of sending the medals M that have been moved from the upstream side to the input sensors 44a and 44b without sending them out of the medal path.

On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the off state (out of the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is off), the blocker 45 moves in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing in FIG. This creates an opening (pitfall) in the medal path. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, the medal M falls from this opening just before reaching M3 and is sent out of the medal path (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M that has fallen from this opening is returned to the medal return slot (not shown) without being detected by the input sensor 44a.

For example, if the specified number of bets for the game have already been placed and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more bets or credits can be made for medals, so the blocker 45 is controlled to be in an OFF state. Thereby, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 in this state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return slot.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so the medals M flowing down in the medal passage pass over the blocker 45 and the input sensors 44a and 44b Can be moved to the side.

In this embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of the on/off state of the blocker 45, the passage sensor 46 can detect the medal M, and when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the medal M can be guided to the input sensors 44a and 44b, and , when the blocker 45 is in the off state, it is only necessary that the medal M can be sent to the medal return slot without being detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 may be located between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

Further, the passage sensor 46 only needs to be located upstream of the blocker 45, and even if the blocker 45 is in the off state, the passage sensor 46 may be located at a position where it can detect the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47. That's fine. In addition, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that it can detect the medal M when it is located at M2, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when the medal M is moved.

The input sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medals M that have passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance apart. First, when the medal M reaches the position M3, the upstream insertion sensor 44a can detect the medal M (turns from OFF to ON). When the medal M further flows down, the input sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off). By determining the on/off timing of these two input sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position M4, it is no longer detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b are sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, from the moment when the medal M is at the M2 position, that is, the medal M becomes invisible when looking at the medal selector from the front, to the moment when the medal M is at the M4 position, that is, the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b. The time it takes to reach (the movement locus is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is set as time T2. Note that this is the value when the medal M is located at M1, the hand is released from the medal M (at an initial speed of "0"), and the medal is released downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is located at M2 exceeds "0".

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal path curves from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with this impact member, the speed of the medal M is reduced and the medal M moves toward the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the input sensor 44a) to the moment when it is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b) is set as time T3. .

<First embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows the voltage level when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or a power outage occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is defined as a supply level V0. At the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which a power outage occurs (an event in which the power supply is cut off) occurs at time S11. In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs, the voltage drops to the power outage detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when a power outage occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when a power outage is detected (time S12; power outage detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms x 20 Interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
On the main control board 50, a voltage monitoring device (not shown) (power-off detection circuit) is provided. When the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, the power-off detection level V1, a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power supply is detected by detecting whether or not the signal is input. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level V1 and becomes less than the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
The example in FIG. 3 shows an example in which the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55 at time S13, and then decreases to Low. Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2, when the power-off occurs at time S11, the main control board 50 is configured so that the power-off process can be completed at least by time S13. It is set to .

Furthermore, the detection of a power outage is executed in the interrupt process that is executed every 2.235 ms, but when a power outage is detected in two consecutive interrupts, the power outage process is executed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is below the power-off detection level V1 in two consecutive interrupt processes, and it is detected that a power-off has occurred. Then, in the next interrupt processing, power-off processing is executed.
Note that in the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power outage is detected, and when a power outage is detected, the process proceeds to power off processing (without proceeding to normal interrupt processing). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The blocker 45 is turned off by the process of turning off the output port 52. Furthermore, the process of saving the stack pointer, setting the power-off processing completed flag (a flag for determining whether or not the power has been turned off normally), executing the checksum of the RWM53, and disabling writing of the RWM53, etc. After being executed sequentially, it enters a reset wait state (loop processing state). By design, this reset wait state is a state in which no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the power-off process is executed in the next interrupt process after the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected (time S12), and the blocker 45 is turned off.
Note that the power-off process is not limited to being executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected, and the power-off process may be executed within the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. In this case, "T1=S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals are inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases his/her hand from the medal M while the medal M is at the position M1. Note that in this case, the medal M falls at an initial velocity of "0". Thereby, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 when the power is cut off is made to coincide with the time when the medal M reaches the position M2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when it is positioned at M4 is defined as T2, but similarly in FIG. 3, time T2 has elapsed from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 It is assumed that later, the medal M is located at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship "T2>T1".

Therefore, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M. Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return slot (lower tray) without being detected by the input sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the input sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M will be swallowed, but after the power is cut off (after time S11), the process of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or credit) is executed. Not done. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that a bet or credit process will be executed after a power outage occurs.

For example, in the case where a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power cutoff processing), when the medal M is located just before M4 in FIG. 2 (the medal M (after the medal has passed the position of M3), the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a, but is not detected by the input sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Further, in the case where a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when time T1 has elapsed (during power cutoff processing), the medal M is located upstream from the position M3 in FIG. At that time, the medal M is not detected by either the input sensor 44a or the input sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.

Further, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment the medal M is positioned at M3 is defined as time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design to satisfy the relationship "T2'>T1".
In the case where the above relationship is designed, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the blocker 45 is turned off by the time when the medal M reaches M3 as the power cut-off process is executed. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the input sensor 44a, and is sent to the medal return slot.

Here, differences between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be explained.
Conventionally, if a power cutoff occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b by the time the power cutoff is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power is cut off, the process of adding "1" to the medal (bet process or credit process) is executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after a power outage occurs. This is because after a power outage occurs, all processing related to the progress of the game should be immediately stopped.
Therefore, if configured as in the first embodiment (A), even if the power is cut off at the moment when the player inserts the medal M from the medal slot 47 and the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after inserting the medal), Since the process of adding "1" to medals is not executed, the functionality of the slot machine 10 can be improved.

<First embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and power-off.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing the process from when the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the arrow direction indicates the advancing (downward) direction of the medal M.
FIG. 4(a) shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the input sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the input sensor 44b remains off. Note that this position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and reaches the state shown in FIG. It becomes like this. Therefore, in FIG. 4(b), the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
In addition, in FIG. 4, even if the input sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the input sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines, but the medal M and the input sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The input sensors 44a and 44b may be placed on the front side of the medal M in the direction perpendicular to the page of FIG. 4, or may be placed on the back side.

When the medal M advances further and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the medal M is detected by both the input sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 mm (so-called 25 pi (φ)) in the general specification, and 30 mm (so-called 30 pi (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b so that the state shown in FIG. 4(c) can be achieved. Here, as will be described later, whether or not the state shown in FIG. 4(c), that is, the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are on (detecting the medal M) is within a predetermined range. It is determined whether or not a medal insertion error is determined. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b also differs depending on how the time during which both input sensors 44a and 44b are on is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the input sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(d). In this case, the input sensor 44a is turned off from on at the moment, and the input sensor 44b remains on. As the medal M advances further, the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(e). Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b changes from on to off at the moment. Note that the position of the medal M in FIG. 4(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a time chart showing on/off of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (the input sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing in FIG. 4(a).
Next, the time at which the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off) (FIG. 4(b)) is S22. Furthermore, the time at which the insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(d)) is S23. Further, the time at which the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(e)) is S24.

Here, the time Ta during which the input sensor 44a detects the medal M (from time S21 to S23
) is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts) (condition 1), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally. However, if it is outside this range, it is determined that a medal passing error has occurred.

Also, the time Tb (from time S22 to S23) during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within the range of 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts). If so (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the passage of the medal M is normal, and if it is out of this range, it determines that there is a medal passage error.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (from time S22 to S24) during which the input sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3) The main control board 50 determines that the passage of the medal M is normal, and when it is out of this range, it is determined as a medal passage error.
If all of the above conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, the passage of the medal M is determined to be normal, and if at least one condition is not satisfied, a medal passage error is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), "1" is subtracted from the input monitoring counter.
Here, the input monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects the medal M, and when the medal passes normally through the input sensors 44a and 44b (both input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). This is a counter that is incremented by "-1" when the switch turns from "on" to "off" (therefore, at time S24). That is, during normal operation, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the input sensors 44a and 44b detect passage of the medal, the input monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error. do.

Further, when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = "+1") and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. However, when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. For example, if the normal value of the input monitoring counter is set to ``0'' to ``2'', when the input monitoring counter becomes ``3'' or higher, the main control board 50 will determine that a medal jam error has occurred. It will be done.
Note that the input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 controls the insertion of the medal. Execute processing (bet processing or credit processing). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, a process of adding "1" to the number of bets is executed. Specifically, if the specified number for the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "0", the number of bets is increased from "0" by adding "1" to the number of bets. Update to "1".

Furthermore, at that point, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
Note that when the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. Thereby, even if a medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if the medal M is inserted, it will not be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In addition to the on/off states of the input sensors 44a and 44b, FIG. 5 also shows timings when a power outage occurs and when a power outage is detected. FIG. 5 shows Examples 1 and 2, both of which take as an example a case where a power outage occurs at the timing when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (time S21).
In Example 1, the power outage is detected after a time T1 has elapsed from the time S21 when the power outage occurred. Here, in Example 1, "T1>T3" is set. Therefore, when the input sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is cut off, the process of adding "1" to the medal M has already been performed when the power cut-off process is started.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 can be expressed as "Ta+Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time of time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts and is "8.94 ms".
Further, the maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
In example 1, the power-off process is always set to be executed after time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power-off (time S21) until the power-off processing is executed is set to be equal to or longer than 114 interrupts.

With the above settings, even if a power outage occurs at the moment when the input sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power outage process will be executed after the process of adding "1" to the medal M is executed. , the medal M is normally bet or credited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal M from being swallowed.

Further, in Example 2, contrary to Example 1, the power-off process is executed before the process of adding "1" to the medal M is executed. That is, in Example 2, the relationship is set to be "T1<T3".
As described above, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 is the minimum time and corresponds to four interrupts. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship "T1<T3", it is necessary to execute the power-off process within three interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off process to be executed within three interrupts from the occurrence of a power-off, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than four interrupts. For example, the minimum time of time Tc may be set to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of power outage (time S21) to the power outage process is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power outage occurs at time S21, the power outage process will be executed before time S24. becomes possible.

When the power-off process is executed, the process of adding "1" to the medal M (bet or credit) is not executed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the input sensor 44a detects the medal M at time S21 (when the power is cut off), the process of adding "1" to the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a disadvantage that the medal M is swallowed, but as explained in the first embodiment (A), after the power is cut off, the process of adding "1" to the medal M etc. is not executed. , the power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and power cutoff.
When adding medals to be paid out to credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the storage area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so that the number corresponds to the number of credits stored in the storage area.

When the medals are to be paid out after the number of credits reaches the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 (ejected from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect on/off status each time one medal is paid out. When the on/off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M The main control board 50 determines that the medal has not been paid out correctly, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

FIG. 6 is a plan view illustrating the operation when medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disk (a substantially disc-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom of the hopper 35, and this hopper disk is rotated by the hopper motor 36. A plurality of openings capable of holding medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disk. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter into the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk is rotated and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are ejected one by one. A new medal M in the hopper 35 enters the empty opening after the medal M is ejected.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 is shown immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. The fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are both components of a medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medals M are paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that moves back and forth every time one medal M is paid out. In the unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is located at the position shown by the solid line in the figure, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7, which will be described later). It is biased towards the 38a side. The medal M (M1) immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk is in contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
Note that when the medal M is placed at the position (M1) shown by the solid line in FIG. narrower than the diameter. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

A pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 is acting on the medals M discharged from the opening of the hopper disk. When a pushing force in the F1 direction is applied to the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the figure. Note that the fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the figure while maintaining contact with the medal M. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves to a position where the medal M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

Thereby, the medal M passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and is ejected in the F1 direction (toward the medal payout port side) in the figure. The medal M at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is ejected, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is returned to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 again by the force of the spring.

FIG. 7 is a plan view illustrating the on (detection)/off (non-detection) states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medals M are paid out as described above in the medal payout device.
FIG. 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) every time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is located at the position shown by the solid line (initial position) in FIG. In the figure, the movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatably movable around the central axis, and is biased clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in the figure, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a in the diagram.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in FIG. 7), it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7(a).

As shown in FIG. 7A, dispensing sensors 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a in the figure. The movable piece 39a is formed to extend toward the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b, and when it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7(a), its tip is being detected by the dispensing sensor 37a. ing.
In addition, in FIG. 7, the housings of both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are illustrated, and the illustration of the light receiving and emitting parts (eyes of the sensors) is omitted. In this point, it is different from the input sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS. 2 and 4, which only show the light receiving and emitting parts (eyes of the sensor).

Here, the dispensing sensor 37a is in an on state (for example, FIG. 7(a)) when it detects the movable piece 39a, and is in an off state (for example, in FIG. 7(b)) when it no longer detects the movable piece 39a. It is set to be.
Similarly, the dispensing sensor 37b is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7(a)) when it does not detect the movable piece 39a, and is in an on state (for example, in FIG. 7(c)) when it detects the movable piece 39a. is set to .
In the state shown in FIG. 7A, the dispensing sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in an on state, and the dispensing sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in an off state.

As explained in FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. When the movable piece 39a moves, the movable piece 39a starts rotating counterclockwise in FIG. 7(a) against the biasing force of the spring 39b. When the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out from inside the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the dispensing sensor 37a no longer detects the movable piece 39a, and is therefore turned off. Moreover, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(b), the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the F2 direction and reaches the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (the position where the medal M can pass through the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b), 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. 7(c). Thereby, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters into the payout sensor 37b, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(c), the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position M2, the force that urges the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in FIG. 6 disappears, so the movable shaft 38b moves to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b shown in FIG. As a result, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise in FIG. 7, the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b no longer detects the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7(d) shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7(d), the payout sensor 37a is in an off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in an off state.

Then, when the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters into the payout sensor 37a, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37a. This returns to the state (initial state) of FIG. 7(a). In the state of FIG. 7A, as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state. Further, when returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the on state.
In FIG. 8, the state before time S31 is as shown in FIG. 7(a). When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is turned off). Next, when time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(c). In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is designated as Td.

The dispensing sensor 37a is in the off state and the dispensing sensor 37b is in the on state until time S33, at which time the dispensing sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(d). In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is designated as Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 7A (initial position), and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is designated as Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on/off state time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that there is a medal payout error when the time is not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, if the payout sensor 37b turns on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a turns off, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b turns on by the 12th interrupt, then the payout sensor 37b turns on. If there is no medal, it is considered a medal payout error.

Further, the time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state is set to be greater than or equal to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is in the off state is monitored, and if the time Te is not within the above predetermined time range, , the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal payout error.

Furthermore, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored, and the time Tf is determined. If the time is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Further, in FIG. 8, as in FIGS. 3 and 5, the time from the occurrence of power-off to the power-off processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that the power is cut off at time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example was explained in which a power-off is detected at the 20th interrupt, but in the example of FIG. 8 (first embodiment (C)), the When T1 has elapsed, the power off is detected and the power off process is executed.

Here, the maximum time (normally) of the time "Td+Tf" is "12+27=39" interrupts, so the time T1 from power-off to execution of power-off processing is set to, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4ms). Set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff process can be started after the payout process for one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td+Tf)<T1".

Conventionally, there have been cases in which a power outage (power outage, etc.) occurs during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the timing of occurrence of the medal payout process and the power cutoff, it may be determined that the medals have been paid out even though the medals have not been paid out, which may cause a loss to the player.
In contrast, in the first embodiment (C), even if a power failure occurs during the medal payout process, the medals can be paid out correctly.

In particular, even if a power outage occurs when the medal payout process is started, that is, at time S31 in FIG. 8, the power outage is detected after the medal payout process is finished, and the process shifts to the power outage process. Therefore, the power-off process is not executed, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is in the off state or at the timing when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the power-off process from being executed in the middle of the medal payout process and the medal payout process being canceled before the (one) medal payout process is normally completed.

Note that if the time T1 is set longer than necessary, there is a risk that the next medal payout process will be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a changes from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, it is set so that "T1<T4".

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to gate marks formed on the board case of the main control board 50.
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, etc. of the gate mark on the substrate case were determined by a mold designer during mold manufacturing solely from the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the gate mark has an uneven surface, for example, even if a hole is drilled aiming at the gate mark, it may not be visually distinguishable (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is located directly below the gate trace, the main CPU 55 could be accessed by drilling a hole in the gate trace and passing a wire through the hole (e.g., if the main CPU 55 is placed directly under the gate trace). There was a risk that it would be carried out. In particular, if the gate mark is shaped to be thinner than other parts, it will be easier to drill holes than other parts.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate marks on the board case are used to prevent theft from being carried out.

FIG. 9 is an exploded external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58).
The board case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded from transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually and clearly confirmed from outside the board case 56.

On the main control board 50, there are electronic components such as the above-mentioned main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display"), set value display LED 73, etc. It is installed. Note that many electronic components such as the above-mentioned RWM 53 and ROM 54 are mounted on the main control board 50, but illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 is equipped with LEDs for confirming failure of the bet switches 40a and 40b, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and the input sensors 44a and 44b. has been done. Note that the failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is off when the start switch 41 is off, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that it is on). ), the LED turns on (lights up).

In addition, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that it is on), and are turned off when the operation switch is turned off. It may be configured so that it lights up.

Furthermore, two LEDs are provided for confirming failure of the bet switches 40a and 40b, one for the bet switch 40a and one for the bet switch 40b, and are off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and when the bet switch 40 is operated, This is an LED that lights up when it receives the electrical signal at that time.
Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 and the input sensors 44a and 44b have a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for each sensor, and are off when no medals are detected, and turned on when a medal is detected. It is an LED.
Then, the administrator operates the start switch 41, for example, and checks whether a failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is turned on or off, thereby determining whether or not the start switch 41 is malfunctioning (energized). can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches or sensors.

Note that the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41, etc. when the front door is opened during normal operation (not changing settings or checking settings). . Alternatively, failure confirmation may be performed by opening the front door and performing a predetermined operation after a door open error occurs. Further, the light may be turned on/off at all times (even while changing or confirming settings) by operating the start switch 41 or the like.

Further, on the main control board 50, the model number of the board is displayed (printed, etc.). Although not shown in FIG. 9, model numbers and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed at the four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four inner corners of the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw hole 50a and the boss 58c overlap, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case 58 by passing a screw through the screw hole 50a and screwing it to the boss 58c. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is stacked on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed in a shape that fits together (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown). ) Further, caulking portions 57a are provided on both left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the figure. Similarly, caulking portions 58a are provided on the left and right sides of the lower cover 58 in the figure. In addition, in FIG. 9, illustration of the specific shape and detailed shape of the caulking portions 57a and 58b is omitted.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and caulked using the caulked parts 57a and 58a, the upper cover must be destroyed (or plastically deformed) at least in part at the caulked parts 57a and 58a. The cover 57 and lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate marks 57b are provided at two locations on the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. Note that in the board case 56 (with the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 fitted together), the side where the main control board 50 is housed is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside". .
In FIG. 9, the gate marks 57b are provided at two locations, but the gate marks 57b are not limited to this, and may be provided at any number of locations.

Here, the "gate" is the sprue used to pour resin (hot water) into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is the mark left at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. be.
When the board case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is low cost to use a mold that is divided vertically in FIG. Further, in the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed on the top surface, not the side surface, as shown in FIG.

Furthermore, considering the cutting of the protrusion at the gate mark during molding, it is preferable that the gate mark is provided on the outside.
From the above, the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
Further, for the same reason as above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outside of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In addition, in FIG. 9, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided in two places like the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57, but they may be provided in one place, or they may be provided in three or more places. Good too.

Furthermore, when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold from the gate, if the resin (hot water) does not spread uniformly within the mold and there is a difference in cooling time, there is a risk that the molded product will warp and deform. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the resin (hot water) spreads uniformly within the mold. Furthermore, when gates are provided at multiple locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gate and the distance between the gates as equal as possible.

In FIG. 10, (a) is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 of the board case 56, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58, and the main control board 50. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). ) is a plan view seen from above. Further, the main control board 50 is illustrated as seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in Figure (a), and (c) shows Example 2 of a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure (a). shows. Note that hatching is omitted in these cross-sectional views for ease of viewing the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, when the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, from the two gate marks 57b to the upper cover 57 in the vertical direction (main control board 50 side) (just below), It is set so that the model number display, management information display LED 74, setting value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are not located. As described above, although the RWM 53, ROM 54, and failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above these.

The reason for arranging the gate traces 57 as described above is as follows.
Even after the slot machine 10 is installed in the market, it is necessary to visually check whether the main control board 50 has been tampered with or not. In particular, it is necessary to check whether the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and ROM 54; the same applies hereinafter) is compliant and whether it has been altered by fraud. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from outside the board case 56. be.
The board case 56 housing the main control board 50 therein is attached to the inside of the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, on the inside of the back surface. This is to install it in a position where the numerical values displayed by the setting value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 can be easily seen.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 visually observes the board case 56 (main control board 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. 10(a). For this reason, if the main CPU 55 or the like is arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, the visibility of the gate mark 57 may be obstructed. In particular, information displayed (printed, etc.) on the top surface of the main CPU 55, etc., can be visually viewed without being hindered in visibility.

Note that since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from transparent resin, visibility is not completely obstructed even if it is located directly below the gate mark 57b. However, as shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 10, the cross section of the gate mark 57b becomes an uneven surface, which reduces visibility directly below the gate mark 57b (worse than a flat surface). That is true. Furthermore, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10(b), since the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, it may become white due to stress during cutting of the resin. Therefore, in this case as well, visibility of the area directly below the gate trace 57b is hindered.

Moreover, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a transparent smooth surface with no irregularities except for the gate marks 57b, even if a hole is made by, for example, tribbing, it can be easily noticed with the naked eye.
On the other hand, the gate trace 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if the gate hole 57b is drilled and then sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to easily visually determine whether or not the gate trace 57b has been drilled. For this reason, there is a possibility that a crime may be carried out using the gate trace 57b.

On the other hand, when a hole is made in the gate trace 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are located in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes easier to tamper with the hole. Therefore, unless the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, making it difficult to stealth.

In addition, the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information in checking for fraud, so in order to make it easier to confirm (read) the model number, the model number is displayed. The gate trace 57b is not arranged directly above the area. Furthermore, when there is a gate mark 57b directly above the model number display, in order to prevent the model number display from being tampered with by drilling a hole in the gate mark 57b and accessing the inside of the board case 56, The gate mark 57b is not placed directly above the model number display.

Furthermore, regarding the setting value display LED 73, it is necessary to check the displayed numerical value when changing or confirming settings. Further, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to check the displayed numerical value in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, accessory ratio, etc. are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the gate trace 57b was not placed directly above these LEDs. Furthermore, in the same way as above, in order to make it difficult for the LEDs inside the board case 56 to be accessed by making a hole in the gate trace 57b using the gate trace 57b and to make it difficult for the LEDs to be stolen, it is possible to make a hole in the gate trace 57b. Avoid placing the gate trace 57b on top.

Regarding the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates an operation switch and checks whether the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch lights up, which improves visibility. For this reason, it is preferable that the gate trace 57b is not located directly above the failure confirmation LED. Similarly to the above, it is also possible to prevent the malfunction confirmation LED from being disposed in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate trace 57b, thereby making it difficult for the user to commit a trifling act.

In FIG. 10, the cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate trace 57b. In Example 1 of (b), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b is left as a flat surface. On the other hand, in Example 2 of (c), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b is formed into a protrusion shape (thick).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at its center, and a recessed portion 57c formed in a cylindrical shape at its outer periphery. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected during molding, and this boundary is cut with a cutter when separating the molded product from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface by a cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: one is to automatically cut the border using a molding machine during injection, and the other is to cut it in a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, processing the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, creating a smooth surface with the height of the protrusion 57d almost "0" is costly. It is difficult and expensive. Therefore, the recessed portion 57c is formed so that even if some height remains in the projection 57d, it does not protrude above the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. Thereby, for example, when an assembly worker touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent injury caused by the protrusion 57d.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate trace 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 becomes thinner by that amount. In this way, if there is even a thin part, it may become easy to make a hole in the recessed part 57c and access the inside of the board case 56.
Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 10(c), a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the outer side of the upper surface where the gate mark 57b is provided to prevent the wall thickness from becoming thinner at the recessed portion 57c. There is. Unless the protrusion 57e is provided and a portion where the wall thickness is reduced is not provided, it is possible to make it difficult to drill a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

Further, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to countermeasures against fraud by preventing a portion of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thinner, but also functions as a dimple (reservoir) during molding. In FIG. 10(b), when resin (hot water) is injected from the gate of the mold (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d), if the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) The flow may change suddenly and become unable to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (pool of hot water) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, the flow of resin (hot water) will be less likely to change suddenly. (hot water) will be able to flow stably. The protrusion 57e has various shapes such as a square cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoid cross section (in the case of FIG. 10(c)), and a dome cross section. Any shape may be used as long as it can prevent this.

Regarding the visibility of the gate mark 57b in the vertical direction (right below), a smooth lower side of the gate mark 57 is better than an uneven shape. Therefore, the shape shown in FIG. 10(b) is better than the shape shown in FIG. 10(c) in terms of visibility directly below the gate mark 57b. Furthermore, compared to the shape of FIG. 10(c), the shape of FIG. 10(b) simplifies the shape of the mold because it is not necessary to form a portion corresponding to the protrusion 57e in the mold. lower costs).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outside (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, a protrusion 57d and a recess 57c shown in FIG. 10(b) are formed on the outside. This is because, as described above, it is convenient for the molding process to provide the projections 57d and the recesses 57c on the outside of the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pin positions of the main CPU 55, etc. of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be located in the vertical direction of the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58. This is to prevent access to the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like by making a hole in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58.
Note that when the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is shaped as shown in FIG. 10(c), the protrusion 57e in FIG. 10(c) will face the pin side of the main control board 50, It goes without saying that the pins protruding from the lower surface of the control board 50 and the protrusion 57e should be formed so as not to interfere with (contact with).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10(a), when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, the gate trace 57b on the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b on the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction. It is preferable to arrange (shift) so that it does not occur. In particular, in the case of the gate marks 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10(b), part of the gate marks 57b and 58b (the recessed part 57c) becomes thinner, but the thinner part is the upper cover. By arranging the lower cover 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions where they do not overlap, it is possible to prevent areas that are likely to be targeted from overlapping.
Furthermore, if the gate mark 57b on the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b on the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark on the other cover can be determined by simply looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate marks 57b on the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b on the lower cover 58 are prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, when communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). This is related to processing when communication is restored after the communication has been completed, or when communication has failed due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as the push order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub control board 80 outputs a performance based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the performance in accordance with the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, making communication impossible. Possible causes include poor contact and radio wave glitches. When the sub control board 80 no longer receives commands from the main control board 50, the presentation stops in its current state. Furthermore, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 determines whether there is a disconnection in communication between them. Therefore, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 will not be able to proceed with the game (operations of the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42). etc.), the command transmission process is continued to the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, it maintains the current performance state.
Note that even if there is a disconnection between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, for example, if AT is in progress, the main control board 50 will activate the instruction function to display the obtained number display LED 78 in the order of pressing. Display instruction information. Thereby, even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning normally, the player can view the press order instruction information and operate the stop switches 42 in the correct press order.
Furthermore, the player can compare the push order instruction information displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 and the performance content (correct press order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, so that the information on both pieces is inconsistent. When this happens, you can know that a problem has occurred in the image display by the sub-control board 80.

For example, in a case where a disconnection occurs during the "N" game and communication is restored during the "N+1" game, the sub control board 80 can receive commands sent from the main control board 50. Sometimes, it is not possible to suddenly switch the performance to the "N+1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (command notifying the start of the game), it indicates that the "N+1" game has started. This is because it cannot be determined. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored after being disconnected, there is a possibility that the player may be misled depending on the content of the performance.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored after being disconnected, we do our best to avoid giving the player a misunderstanding, while giving the performance a sense of discomfort. Outputs a performance that appears to be non-existent.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 (described as "main operation" in FIG. 11) and the display of effects by the sub-control board 80 (described as "sub-display" in FIG. 11) in the third embodiment. ), and shows five examples consisting of Pattern 1 (Example 1) to Pattern 5 (Example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 all show examples in which communication becomes unavailable (disconnection occurs) during the "N" game, and communication is restored during the "N+1" game.
Furthermore, in the main operation of FIG. 11, "bet" means when the bet switch 40 is operated and a specified number of bets are validly placed. Furthermore, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after a specified number of bets have been placed. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped).

Further, in the sub-display, the "push order effect" means an effect that displays an image of the correct press order in a game in which the player wins a press order bell or a press order replay, for example. Specifically, for example, "right-left-middle display" means an effect that informs that the correct pressing order is "right-left-middle". For example, "left center display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, and indicates that the second stop switch to be operated is on the left and the third stop switch 42 to be operated is in the middle. It means a performance that informs people.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is an effect that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 has been operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated for the "N" game, the main control board 50 performs a lottery of the winning combination, as described above. In this game, this is an example in which the correct push order bell is won, with "right, left, center" being the correct push order. In this case, if the main control board 50 is in AT mode, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct push order "right left middle" to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it outputs a press order effect to the image display device 23 that displays the correct press order of "right, left, middle".
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays press order instruction information corresponding to the correct press order "right, left, middle" on the acquisition number display LED 78 (operation of instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player looks at the correct pressing order and operates the right stop switch 42 as a first stop (right stop). As a result, the right reel 31 stops and a command to that effect is sent to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs the effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 has stopped), and displays the right-left center display and the left center display (in addition, other Examples of the display include "-center left", "×center left", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (sub-disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication becomes unavailable during the game.

The main control board 50 allows the game to proceed even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning). The example of pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 were each operated (the left and middle reels 31 stopped) after a wire breakage occurred in the "N" game. ).

Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the "N+1" game number is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the push order bell (or push order replay) in which "right, left, middle" is the correct push order is won. In addition, in the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of right, left, middle, but if a winning combination is won with the correct pressing order of right, left, middle. It is not limited to , but any winning lottery result may be used.

It should be noted that when the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order is won in the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78. Therefore, even if the correct pressing order is not displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order based on the pressing order instruction information displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N+1" game, the player operates the right stop switch 42 first. After that, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
As a result, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the image display to correspond to the received command. That is, an image is displayed to show that the left stop has been performed (left stop effect). Here, the sub control board 80 updates the effect as a continuation of the effect already displayed, that is, as a effect of the "N" game.

Therefore, in reality, the second stop switch 42 (left) for the "N+1" game is being operated, but the sub-control board 80 indicates that the second stop switch 42 (left) for the "N" game is being operated. Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct pressing order in the "N" game is to the left, in this example, the operations are performed in the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) and outputs the final medium display effect.

Then, in the "N+1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it outputs a performance corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, a medium stop performance.
In addition, even if you win a role with a correct pressing order on the "N+1" game, and the correct pressing order is other than right, left, middle, under the situation of pattern 1, the effect will be output as described above. be done. In other words, in the "N+1" game, if the push order operated by the player is right, left, center, even if the push order corresponds to an incorrect push order, the push order will fail like pattern 2 described later. The performance is not output.

Furthermore, in the case of the "N+1" game, if the winning combination does not have a correct pressing order, or even if the winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, center, then the above The same effect will be output. That is, even if the "N+1" game number does not have the correct pressing order, the sub-control board 80 (in the example of pattern 1) will display a message indicating that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after communication is restored. When a command is received, a left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) is output, and a middle display is further output.

Next, when a bet for the “N+2” game is made and the start switch 41 is operated to start the “N+2” game, the main control board 50 causes the sub control board 80 to “ N+2'' command corresponding to the start of the game number is transmitted. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands such as the production group number and the push order instruction number are transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives these commands, it performs a press order effect and a display of the correct press order, as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N+1" game, the sub control board 80 operates based on the command received from the main control board 50 (for the "N+1" game). The effect continues to be output, and when the ``N+2'' game starts, the effect is updated to the effect for the ``N+2'' game.
In addition, the main control board 50 may send a command for the number of coins acquired to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game, and the sub-control board 80 may also display an image of the number of coins acquired during AT. In such a case, the sub control board 80 cannot receive the command for the number of acquired coins at the end of the "N" game, that is, while the wire is disconnected. ” The number of acquired coins at the end of the game remains displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and a command for the number of acquired coins is received at the end of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display to show the number of acquired coins at the end of the "N+1" game. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Further, the timing of disconnection is the same as pattern 1, but the timing of communication restoration is different from pattern 2. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N+1" game.
In pattern 2, the main action and sub-display in the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1, so their explanation will be omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of right, left, and middle, but communication is assumed to be restored after the second stop on the left.

Immediately before communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect of the "N" game number and the middle left display. In this state, communication is restored and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) during the "N+1" game, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives a middle stop command while displaying the middle left display, it determines that the pressing order is incorrect and outputs a pushing order failure effect. Note that in the third embodiment, after the push order failure effect is output, subsequent press order effects and the like are not output.

In addition, in the "N+1" game, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pushing the middle left and right, the communication is restored after the middle left stop, and then the right stop is performed, so that the right stop command is changed to the sub control. When transmitted to the board 80, the push order failure effect is output in the same manner as above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the process of outputting the right stop effect and the left center display, if it receives the right stop command at this point, it means that it has received the same stop command twice in one game. . Even in such a case, it is treated as a failure in the pressing order without giving an error notification or the like, and the effect is output.
Then, as in pattern 1, when the "N+2" game number is started, the command at the time of starting the "N+2" game number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub control board 80 starts producing the "N+2" game number.

In pattern 3, the main action and sub-display for the "N" game are the same as pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N+1" game. Therefore, in the "N+1" game, after the communication is restored, a command for the left stop, which is the third stop, is sent to the sub control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left middle display" for the "N" game, if it receives a left stop command in this state, it determines that it is the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (push order correct effect), and then outputs a middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N+1" game ends the game at the third stop on the left. Next, when the game moves to the "N+2" game, and the command at the start of the "N+2" game is sent to the sub-control board 80, upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 starts the "N+2" game. Switch to the performance at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and middle display that had been output until then are canceled. Also, even if a command for the start of the "N+2" game is received while the medium display is being output, an error notification etc. is not performed, and the effect at the start of the "N+2" game is output according to the received command. .

Pattern 4 is an example in which the remaining number of games during AT is displayed in the sub-display. Furthermore, in pattern 4, the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command for the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub control board 80 receives a command indicating the remaining number of games for AT from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the number of remaining games for AT. Note that during AT, the display of the remaining number of games is not displayed alone, but is output together with the press order effect of pattern 3.

In pattern 4, the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games during AT to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game). Here, in the "N" game, it is assumed that the number of remaining AT games is 10 games.
At the start of the "N" game, the sub control board 80 displays the number of remaining games during AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50.
Then, if the wire is disconnected during the "N" game and the disconnection state continues at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 will cause the sub Although the sub-control board 80 executes a process for transmitting a command for the number of remaining games (9 games) during AT to the control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to a disconnection). Therefore, for the "N+1" game, "10 remaining games" for the "N" game remain displayed.

Then, during the "N+1" game (after the middle left stop), the communication is restored, and when the game moves on to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 connects to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. In contrast, a command indicating the remaining number of games (8 games) during AT is sent. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display from the remaining 10 games to the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example in which the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as pattern 4, but the "N" game is played with only one remaining AT game.
At the start of the "N" game (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games (one game remaining) during AT to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display of the remaining two games (from the previous display of the remaining two games) to the display of the remaining one game.
In the case where a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 determines that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). Although a command indicating that it is a game is sent to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N+1" game, the display that there is one AT game remaining continues.

Further, when the sub-control board 80 ends AT, it outputs an AT end effect. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on the reception (at the start of the game) of a command indicating that the remaining number of games during AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, the sub control board 80 has not received a command indicating that the remaining number of games during AT is 0 games, so the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even at the end of the "N+1" game, the effect indicating that there is only one AT game remaining is output.

Then, when the "N+1" game is completed and the transition is made to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. Send. Based on receiving this command, the sub control board 80 erases the display of "1 game remaining" and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
Furthermore, at the end of the AT, an image such as "Pachinko/pachislot is a game machine that can be enjoyed in moderation" is displayed to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, the image cannot be displayed. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this, the game history is managed on the sub-control board 80 side, and when the next game (in the example of FIG. An example of this is to display the image at the start of the process.

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when a disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection occurred in the "N" game until communication is restored, and "N+1 ”
When communication is restored in the middle of the game, the continuation of the performance being output as the "N" game is output based on the command received in the "N+1" game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when the left stop command is received after communication is restored on the "N+1" game, regardless of whether or not the stop switches 42 were actually operated in the correct pressing order, A press order effect will be output.

On the other hand, for example, in pattern 1, if a medium stop command is received after communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the pressing order of the effects currently being output, that is, the "N" game. Since the incorrect press order is used for the middle left display, the press order failure effect is output regardless of whether or not the stop switches 42 are actually operated in the correct press order. However, even if the push order failure effect is output in the "N+1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 according to the correct press order in the "N+1" game, the symbols will be advantageous to the player. Since the combinations are stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

As described above, when communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the "N+1" game outputs a performance that takes over the performance before the disconnection ("N" game), and the "N+2" game Reset the performance at the start (return to the correct performance). This makes it possible to minimize the output of unnatural performances and to prevent misunderstandings to players as much as possible in both games where disconnection has occurred and games where communication has been restored.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 11, communication was restored in the "N+1" game after a disconnection occurred in the "N" game, but communication was restored after two or more games had passed after the disconnection occurred. However, the result is the same as that shown in FIG.
For example, if a disconnection occurs in the "N" game, and communication is restored in the "N+a" game (a = "2" or more), the disconnection occurs in the "N" game up to the "N+a-1" game. The previous performance continues to be output. Then, in the "N+a" game where the communication is restored, the continuation of the performance of the "N" game that has been continued to be output is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N+a+1" game, the performance is updated to the effect (correct performance) at the start of the "N+a+1" game.

<Fourth embodiment>
When rotating and stopping the reel 31, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (hereinafter referred to as a "four-phase excitation state") is established for a predetermined time (time T11 described later).
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. Note that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawing. Further, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has a structure like that shown in FIG. 12. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pressed until it returns to its original state is illustrated in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player's side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the side above the front door 12 is the side visible to the player.
Furthermore, the line where the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. The moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12(a), the stop button 42a is an operating body for the stop switch 42, and is operated by the player (pushed into the inside of the slot machine 10) when turning on the stop switch 42. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged so as to protrude from the front door 12 provided at the front of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When this part is viewed from the front on the player's side, it has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the no-load state, the stop button 42a is biased in the F3 direction (outward direction, toward the player) in FIG. The player side end of 42a protrudes from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion of the stop button 42a (hereinafter referred to as the "flange-shaped portion") in the figure is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the housing), and is a portion that comes into contact with the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed in, and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. It is.

A movable piece 42d that is movable integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the lower surface side of the stop button 42a in the figure. Furthermore, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) in the figure, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 12 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip of the moving piece 42d (lower end in the figure) is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state shown in (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e is not detecting the moving piece 42d and is in an off state.

Next, as shown in (b) in the figure, when the player wants to stop the rotation of the reels 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure, the movable piece 42d, which is integral with the stop button 42a, also moves downward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters into the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. FIG. 12(b) shows the positions of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is further pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 12(b), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c, as shown in FIG. 12(c). This position is the deepest position when the stop button 42a is pressed. Moreover, in the state of FIG. 12(c), the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, so the detection sensor 42e is in the on state.

When the player releases the push button 42a from the state shown in FIG. 12(c) (removes the force in the direction F4 in FIG. 12(c)), the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c causes the stop button 42a to be pressed down. A force is applied to return it to its initial position. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d that is integral with the stop button 42a move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not come into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12(d)).

FIG. 12(d) shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state. In the state shown in FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state shown in FIG. 12(d), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12(a), and is the no-load state of the stop button 42a.
Note that FIG. 12(b) shows the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state, and FIG. 12(d) shows the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state.
) are generally the same, but there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

FIG. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32 in the fourth embodiment, in which (a) shows example 1, and (b) shows example 2. show.
In FIG. 13(a), the stop button 42a is at the initial position in the no-load state (FIG. 12(a)), and the time at which the stop button 42a starts to be pressed is S41. S42 is the time when the stop button 42a is pressed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(b) is reached. The stop button 42a is further pushed in from that position, and the time when the stop button 42a reaches the deepest position (when the state shown in FIG. 12(c) is reached) is defined as S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the pressing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes longer, and if the stop button 42a is pushed quickly, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes shorter.

Next, at time S44, the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is assumed that the stop button 42a is located at the deepest position at time S44.
When the stop button 42a is released from being pressed down, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to cause the stop button 42a to return to its initial position, as described above. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment the button 42a is released.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e turns from on to off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(d) is reached, is defined as S45. Here, the time from time S44 to S45 is assumed to be T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (movement distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the stop switch 42 is turned on (specifically, the detection sensor 42e is turned on) (in the state shown in FIG. 12(b)), the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the winning lottery result by the winning lottery means (result determined by the internal lottery means). As described above, the time from when the reel 31 stop control is started (from when the detection sensor 42e is turned on) until the reel 31 stops is as follows (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, the number of frames to be moved is within 5 frames, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20 symbols, the number of frames to be moved is within 4 frames). Therefore, the time from when the reels 31 start decelerating to when the reels 31 stop is not constant because it varies depending on the lottery result and the position of the reels 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Furthermore, after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position, the reel control means 65 keeps the motor 32 in a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (braked) for a predetermined period of time (the four-phase excitation state described above). ).
Here, the motor 32 in this embodiment is a 4-phase stepping motor, and during rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31), for example, 1/2 phase excitation is performed (note that the motor 32 is not limited to 1/2 phase excitation. do not have). Therefore, even while the motor 32 is rotating, it is in one excitation state. When the rotational drive of the motor 32 is stopped, a four-phase excitation state is set.
In addition, when performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when making the reel 31 appear to vibrate at the stop position), the reel 31 should be in a three-phase excitation state, for example, instead of a four-phase excitation state. is also possible.

At the moment when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a risk that the rotation of the motor 32 and the reel 31 will exceed the desired stop position due to the inertia of the rotation of the motor 32 and the reel 31. By setting it in a four-phase excitation state and generating static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stopped position due to inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, reception of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, the operation of the next stop switch 42 is permitted because the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state shown in FIG. 12(d)). ), and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32, which has stopped its rotational drive, has ended.

The reason for controlling in this way is as follows.
In order to maintain the stopped position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to a four-phase excitation state, but when controlled in this way, a larger load is applied than in normal times, so the overall load on the slot machine 10 is reduced. It gets bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is finished, the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In example 1 of FIG. 13(a), when the winning lottery result by the winning lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the push order bell is won), the 4-phase excitation state is activated. The excitation time T12 from start to end is set to 90 interrupts (2.235×90=201.15 ms). Here, when the lottery result is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 of the 4-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupts" because the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the lottery result. This means that it is not necessarily true.

Therefore, in Example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set so that "T11<T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from time S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As mentioned above, when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21", the number of moving frames during stop control is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20", Since the number of moving frames during stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within approximately "40" to "190" ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e changes from the OFF state to the ON state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest position and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to S44) is , about "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the stop button 42a is released from being pressed are close to each other (almost the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing when the stop button 42a is released from being pressed (time S44), and after the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (time S45), It is designed so that the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to turn off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to allow the next operation of the stop button 42a to be accepted at the end of the four-phase excitation state. . This allows the game to proceed at high speed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13(b), from the moment when the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest point is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off (at time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until reaching the target) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, as in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started from the moment when the push button 42a that has reached the deepest part is released (time S44), and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is It is designed so that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to be completed when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the next operation reception of the stop button 42a is permitted as soon as the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. This allows the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in terms of control.
Note that Examples 1 and 2 in FIG. 13 show examples in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11<T12" is satisfied, the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be completed more quickly in Example 1.

<Fifth embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between power on/off and program startup.
FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 14, (a) is a diagram showing a state when power is cut off after starting the main program (program of the main control board 50). It is assumed that the power is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), power supply starts to both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level of the sub-control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). Note that in FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, power-off detection level V1, and drive voltage limit V2 are the same as in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

After the power is turned on at time S51, the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 reach the supply level V0 is defined as S52. Thereafter, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 is activated from time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 is started from time S54 when time T23 (T23>T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the subprogram is started first and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 sends the first command to the sub control board 80 after power is turned on. This is to keep the sub-control board 80 side in a state where the command can be received.

Next, when a power outage (such as turning off the power switch 11 or a power outage) occurs at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level decreases, if the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 can execute the power-off process.
Further, when a power outage occurs at time S55, the voltage reaches the power outage detection level V1 at time T0 (20th interrupt) as in FIG. 3, and power outage is detected (time S56). Furthermore, after the power-off is detected, similarly to FIG. 3, the power-off process is executed, for example, after one interrupt. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
After that, when time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2 and the program (processing) cannot be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is controlled to end before time S58 is reached.

When the main program starts at time S54, it sets the main CPU 55, checks the RWM 53, checks whether the previous power off was normal, checks the status of the setting key switch, etc., and then starts interrupt processing. . When the setting key switch is off, the power-off recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after starting the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to the setting change process after starting the interrupt process.
As shown in FIG. 14(a), if a power-off occurs after starting the main program and the setting key switch is off, the power-off process is executed after the power-off recovery process is completed. do. This allows the program to terminate normally.
On the other hand, if a power-off occurs after starting the main program and the setting key switch is on, the power-off process is executed without starting the setting change process. This is because if the setting change process is executed after a power outage occurs, a problem may occur.

Furthermore, in order to properly execute the main program, the settings of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 must be executed even if a power outage is detected at the same time as the main program is started.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, it is always executed until the interrupt is started even if the power is subsequently cut off. This is to detect power outage in interrupt processing. Note that, as in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the "N" interrupt, a voltage drop (power outage detection level V1) that is determined to have occurred is detected, and the next "N+1" game is started. However, when the voltage drop is detected, a power outage is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (it is determined that the power is out). Then, the power-off process is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program is started at time S54, and the power is turned off at time S55. However, even if a power outage occurs at the same time as time S54 (startup of the main program), the setting is such that the power outage processing can be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14A, the time T21 from power-on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52) is the period from when the power is turned off (time S55) until the voltage reaches the Low level. It is set to be shorter than the time T24.
Furthermore, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 until the main program is activated) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14(b) is an example in which power is cut off before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 14(b), the power is turned on at time S51, and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is before time S54 in FIG. 14(a). That is, after the power necessary for starting the main program (supply level V0) is supplied, a power outage occurs before a predetermined time (time T23) has elapsed (before reaching time S54), and the voltage has decreased. This is an example. In such a case, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and eventually the power becomes Low level.
Note that in the example of FIG. 14(b), when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Although not shown in FIG. 14, it is possible that the power is cut off immediately after the subprogram starts (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program starts). It will be done.
If a power-off occurs at the above-mentioned timing, the subprogram executes the subprogram's power-off processing. Then, it is possible to complete the subprogram power-off process before the voltage supplied to the sub control board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, since the power is cut off at the above-mentioned timing before the main program is started, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, a passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 not only increases the accuracy of medal insertion determination, but also is effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only the pair of input sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the input sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect medals M moving in a substantially horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M when it is falling substantially vertically downward.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but the blocker 45 is not limited thereto. Any device may be used as long as it has a function of sending the medals M out of the medal path before the medals M are detected by the input sensor 44a.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2, the input sensors 44a and 44b are shown to detect slightly above the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product may be configured like this. does not mean. The input sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they can reliably detect the passing medals M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment the medal M is positioned at M4, but it is not limited to this. For example, the medal M may be at position M1 in FIG. 2, and the time from the moment the medal is released to the time it reaches M4 may be T2, and "T2>T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time taken for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be set to T2, and "T2>T1" may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off process.
Alternatively, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a, but is not detected by the input sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), a power outage occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, and the time T1 from detecting the power outage to executing power outage processing (blocker off) An example of setting is to be shorter than the time required for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position M2 (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the blocker 45 has already been turned off by the time the medal M reaches the blocker 45 position from the M2 position. Therefore, the medal can be prevented from passing through the input sensors 44a and 44b.
In addition, in the above, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment the hand is released at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power-off process (blocker off) may be set to be executed after, for example, "2" to "5" interrupt processes, counting from the interrupt process in which a power-off is detected. Alternatively, the power-off process (blocker off) may be executed by an interrupt process when a power-off is detected.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, the time T0 for the voltage to reach the maintenance level V1 from the supply level V0 when a power outage occurs is set to 20 interrupts, but this is not limited to this. Various settings can be made depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is dispensed by the medal dispensing device, the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medals M themselves to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the input sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the medals M (to be paid out).

In addition, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in this way, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Dispensing sensor 37a on, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S31')
Dispensing sensor 37a on, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S32')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S33')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S34')
Follow the progress.
Then, the time from time S31' to S34' is set to be shorter than time T1 (time from occurrence of power-off to execution of power-off processing).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed part 57c are on the outside, but conversely, it is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed part 57c are on the inside. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate mark 58b on the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate trace 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. 10(b), the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 will be a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape shown in FIG. 10(c) is adopted, a protrusion 57e is formed on the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

(11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the board case 56, the main control board 50 is housed inside. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which it is desired to prevent fraud, such as the board case of the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 also includes an RWM 83, a ROM 54, a sub-CPU 85, etc., but on the upper surface of the upper cover in the board case of the sub-control board 80, at least One example is not to arrange the CPU 85, and furthermore, not to arrange the RWM 83 or ROM 54. Similarly, it is possible to prevent the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 from overlapping in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace.

(12) In the third embodiment, the push order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the number of remaining games during AT are given as examples. The third embodiment can be applied even when displaying the number of acquired coins and the remaining number of acquired coins in a game (BB game, etc.).
For example, the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N" is "200", the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N+1" is "209", and the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N+2" is "218'' sheets. It is also assumed that the main control board 50 transmits a command regarding the number of acquired coins to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game.
As in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs during the "N" game, and communication is restored during the "N+1" game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the number of acquired coins in the "N" game. Further, at the start of the "N+1" game, a command regarding the number of acquired coins is not received (due to a disconnection), so the display of the acquired number of coins "200" is also maintained in the "N+1" game. Next, when the sub control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of acquired coins at the start of the "N+2" game, it updates the display to show the acquired number of coins "218" based on the command.

(13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the "N+2" game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be restored to normal after all "N+1" game numbers are stopped or when a bet operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore normal image display at a predetermined timing based on a command sent to the sub-control board 80 during or after a complete shutdown.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the "N+1" game where the line is disconnected, there is a case where the player wins an additional (addition) lottery for the number of coins that can be obtained during AT or the number of games played. In this case, since the "N+1" game number is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the additional (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N+2" game, the sub control board 80 An example of this is displaying game information (number of coins that can be acquired and number of games played) after addition.

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, if the wire is disconnected after the first right stop of the "N" game, and the communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N+1" game is operated. is possible. Then, in the "N+1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the first stop on the right. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command for the "N+1" game, it means that it has received the stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated, so it does not perform the press order failure effect. Output. Then, the image display may be restored to normal at the time of a bet operation after all the "N+1" games are stopped or at the start of the "N+2" games.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the number of acquired coins is displayed as an image during AT, the following method may be cited as an example of the process of updating the image display of the acquired number of coins before and after the disconnection.
When there is a payout process, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of acquired coins to the sub control board 80. Here, when a disconnection occurs during the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the number of acquired coins for the "N" game. It is assumed that immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 was displaying "100" as the number of coins acquired during AT. Furthermore, it is assumed that the "N" game number and the "N+1" game number during AT will each acquire 10 coins.
In this case, the number of coins acquired during AT at the end of the "N" game should originally be "110", but it remains "100" (because of the disconnection). Then, it is assumed that communication is restored during the "N+1" game. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 is able to return the number of coins acquired during AT to a normal value based on the command for the number of acquired coins received during the payout process for the "N+1" game. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of the payout process for the "N+1" game, or it may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N+2" game, as in the example of FIG. Furthermore, it may be updated to "110" during the payout process for the "N+1" game, and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is also applicable to, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. In pachinko gaming machines, there is a starting hole (a winning hole that starts the symbol fluctuations by the symbol fluctuation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the jackpot lottery), an electric chew prize opening (when a game ball wins, the next winning hole is triggered). In order to make it easier, there are various winning openings such as an accessory that opens for a certain period of time and then closes.The electric chew is not limited to the shape of a tulip. provided. And it is possible to apply 1st Embodiment (B) in these winning a prize openings.

Specifically, for example, the starting hole includes a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has entered the starting hole) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the winning sensor). It is provided. In addition, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has won by the attacker) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of a starting opening, if the power is cut off at the moment when a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the setting is made so that the discharge sensor can detect the game ball before the power cutoff process is executed. Thereby, even if the power is cut off at the moment when a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the winning balls can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from not being paid out even though the game balls have entered the prize opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "reel-type gaming machine" installed in a No. 4 business store that is subject to the Entertainment Business Law. (So-called "pachislot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that do not use medals used for games as gaming media.

Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37) in FIG. 1, for example. Further, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can also be made unnecessary. All of the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded by winning combinations are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
Even in such casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines), the present invention can be applied to all of the above-mentioned embodiments and the following embodiments, except for the first embodiment.

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
Further, FIG. 15(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing the state before the last ejected medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing a state where the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is more advanced than that shown in FIG.

Furthermore, FIG. 16(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16(b) is a plan view of the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by being pushed.
Further, FIG. 17(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the disk is stopped.

In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 that rotates the hopper disk 101. Further, as in the first embodiment, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The main control board 50 then controls the driving of the hopper motor 36.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed into a disk shape, and the hopper disk 101 has a holding portion that is an opening that can hold medals stored in the hopper. Eight pieces 102 are provided along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in the shape of a circular hole passing through the hopper disk 101 from the upper surface to the lower surface. The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed to enter into each holding part 102 from the upper opening of each holding part 102 and to be held by each holding part 102, respectively.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disk 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in each holding section 102 move clockwise in an arc together with the hopper disk 101, and are sequentially ejected from the ejection section 103.
When a medal is discharged from the discharge section 103, the holding section 102 that held the medal becomes empty. Then, other medals stored in the hopper 35 newly enter into the empty holding section 102.

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes a fixed shaft 38a and a movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is a discharge section 103 from which medals are discharged.
As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves and the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal. and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, the medals will be ejected from the ejecting section 103.
Further, the moment when the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. It's a moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medals have been ejected from the ejection section 103.

In addition, in one payout process, the last medal to be ejected from the dispensing unit 103 is referred to as the "last ejected medal", and in the next payout process, the medal to be ejected first from the dispensing part 103 is referred to as the "first medal". It is called "Ejection Medal".
In FIGS. 15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medals marked with the letter "A" are the last medals to be ejected in one payout process, and the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first medals to be ejected in the next payout process.

In addition, the position of the holding section 102 where the last ejected medal is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 in one payout process is referred to as the "first position", and The position of the holding section 102 where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 in the process is referred to as a "second position."
FIG. 17(a) shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 (the hopper disk 101, each holding section 102, each medal with letters "A" to "D", and the fixed shaft 38a). , and the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17(a), the position of the holding part 102 where the medal with the letter "A" was held is the first position, and the medal with the letter "B" is held. The position of the holding part 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when the main control board 50 finishes one payout process, the holding part 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is moved to the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 stops when the hopper disk 101 is located between the
FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped after the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. In FIG. 17(b), the first position and the second position are each indicated by a broken line. Furthermore, in FIG. 17(b), the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first ejected medals in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the hopper disk 101 is held in a state where the holding part 102 holding the medal with the letter "B" is located between the first position and the second position. rotation has stopped.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
For this reason, at the end of the payout process, the main control board 50 supplies the hopper motor 36 with a current in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, so that the drive of the hopper motor 36 is abruptly stopped, and the hopper disc 101 The rotation of can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medals are ejected from the ejection section 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects this fact.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting section 103, a current is applied to the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when ejecting medals, and the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is controlled. When stopped suddenly, the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Furthermore, by passing current through the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction, and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the opposite direction (rotated counterclockwise). .
Therefore, even if the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process passes the second position at the end of the payout process, the current is applied to the hopper in the opposite direction to that when discharging the medals. By flowing the motor 36, the hopper disk 101 can be reversely rotated and returned to the second position.
Then, by returning the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal to the second position, the first ejected medal can start moving from the same second position each time. As a result, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first ejected medals can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is applied to the DC motor as the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, and the state of medal discharge from the discharge section 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18, the upper line shows the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the middle line shows the driving state of the hopper motor 36, and the lower line shows the medal ejection status from the ejection unit 103.

Further, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port included in the main control board 50, and when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, a constant current is applied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 changes from on to off, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, "stop" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and "constant speed" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft is at a constant speed. (constant speed) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop" and then reaches "constant speed."
Further, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is tilted upward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal is turned on from off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates.
Therefore, if the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 will gradually accelerate until the holding section 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal ejection interval at constant speed.
That is, when the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving the hopper motor 36 until the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 is longer than the hopper motor. This is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft No. 36 is rotating at a constant speed.
This may give the player a feeling that the first (first) medal is delayed in being ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the main control board 50 is configured such that, at the end of one payout process, the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the positioned state.
If the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position will be shorter than when it stops at the second position. . As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when stopping at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates, the first (first) medal It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the game is delayed.

Furthermore, when the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, two adjacent holding sections 102 on the hopper disk 101 are stopped as shown in FIG. A portion corresponding to the space between the two is located in front of the discharge section 103.
As a result, a fraudulent act (goto act) in which a fraudulent instrument such as a wire is inserted through the medal dispensing port provided at the lower front of the front door 12 and attempts to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101 with this fraudulent instrument is carried out. Even if the hopper disk 101 is broken, the corresponding portion between the two adjacent holding parts 102 acts as a barrier, and the holding part 10 is blocked by an unauthorized instrument.
Access to 2 can be prevented.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in each holding section 102 are sequentially ejected from the ejecting section 103 at equal intervals.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 turns from on to off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed" and then reaches "stop."
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is diagonally downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerating.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal is turned from on to off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually decelerates.
Then, the last ejected medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejecting section 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, whereby the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decelerates, and the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is positioned between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from off, it then transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout start command, the sub control board 80 starts processing related to outputting the payout sound. Thereafter, output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, after the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from on to off, it then transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout process.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout end command, the sub control board 80 ends the process regarding output of the payout sound. As a result, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the "payout sound" means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 side in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as "purururu" can be output from the speaker 22.
In addition, "processing related to outputting sound" refers to a series of processing such as selecting a sound to output, selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. It means something. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

Then, when the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80, and upon receiving the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 performs processing related to the output of the payout sound. By starting , the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 .

Further, when the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it sends a payout end command to the sub-control board 80, and upon receiving the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 performs processing related to the output of the payout sound. By ending the process, when the ejection of medals from the ejection unit 103 is stopped, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be made to end.
This can give the player the impression that the medal payout and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship among the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of ejecting medals from the ejecting section 103.
When a payout winning combination is won, the main control board 50 sets payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36.
For example, when a winning combination of 10 medals is won and 10 medals are to be paid out, "10" is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 as data on the number of medals to be paid out.
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 "starts" (starts driving) from a "stopped" state, goes through "acceleration", and reaches a "constant speed".
Note that at the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of the process, the hopper motor 36 is made to reach a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position. are doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 goes from "stop" to "acceleration" to "constant speed", the holding part 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position. The medals are surely ejected from the ejecting section 103.
Furthermore, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are off.
Note that the timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the dispensing sensor 37a is set so that it is off when it is detecting the movable piece 39a, and it is on when it is not detecting the movable piece 39a.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to be highly active similarly to the first embodiment (C). That is, the dispensing sensor 37b is set so that it is off when it is not detecting the movable piece 39a, and it is on when it is detecting the movable piece 39a.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off.
Note that in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the payout sensor 37b is set to high active. The on/off waveform is reversed.

Further, at the timing (b) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is moved by the medal pushing the movable shaft 38b, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
Note that the state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing (c) in FIG. 19, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, and the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is also in the on state. Become. At this time, the medals are ejected from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejecting section 103).
Note that the state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Furthermore, at the timing (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is biased by the spring 39b and is returning to its original position, and the dispensing sensor 37a is in the on state and the dispensing sensor 37b is in the off state. becomes.
Note that the state (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b and returns to its original position, and the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been ejected, and updates the payout number data.
Note that the state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When dispensing "N" medals, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N"th medal has been dispensed.
When determining that the "N"th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36.
Furthermore, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 undergoes "deceleration" and then comes to "stop."
This completes the payout process for "N" medals.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, payout number data is set. This process is a process of storing payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is stored as payout number data. Then, the process advances to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts. Then, the process advances to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by the medal) is turned on. It is set to be.

If "Yes" is determined in step S103, the process advances to the next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, if "Yes" in step S104, the process advances to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, if the payout sensor 37b is already on, the result in step S104 is "No". In this case, it is possible that medals are jammed in the ejection section 103 (medal jam error). Furthermore, when a medal jamming error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medals are removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, remove the stuck medal and operate the reset switch to clear the error.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined time in step S103 (the predetermined time elapses with "No"), an error occurs. In this case, it is possible that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). Furthermore, when a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the hopper 35 is replenished with medals and the reset switch is operated, the error is canceled.
In step S105, the main control board 50 again determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S105, the process advances to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S105, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37b is on. If "Yes" is determined in step S106, the process advances to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S107, the process advances to the next step S108. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S107, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in step S104 or S105.

Proceeding to step S108, the main control board 50 next determines whether the payout sensor 37b is off. If "Yes" is determined in step S108, the process advances to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. Further, if "Yes" is determined in step S109, the process advances to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
If "Yes" in step S110, the process advances to the next step S111. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S110, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in steps S104, S105, or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process in which "1" is subtracted from the payout number data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and the data after the subtraction is stored as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout number data is "0" or not. Here, when "Yes" in step S112, the process advances to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, the medals discharged from the discharge section 103 are normally guided to a medal receiving tray through a passage called a medal chute.
However, in rare cases, the medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 may bounce off the inner wall of the medal chute and return to the ejecting section 103. At this time, the rebounding medal may hit the next medal that is about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 and push back the medal that is about to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process in FIG. do.
This makes it possible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 is pushed back.

For example, assume that one medal is about to be ejected, this medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off. (Timing of (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that a medal that was paid out before this medal bounces back and hits this medal, and this medal is pushed back and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is returned in step S105 in FIG. 20, resulting in an error.
Further, for example, suppose that the medal is pushed back at the timing (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is returned in step S107 in FIG. 20, resulting in an error.

<Modification of the sixth embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with eight holding portions 102, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight. For example, the number of holding portions may be five, six, ten, etc. It can be set as appropriate depending on the situation.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed into a disk shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hopper disk 101 may be formed into a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding part 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disk 101 during the medal dispensing process is clockwise; however, the rotation direction is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disk 101 may rotate counterclockwise and the holding portion 102 The medals held in the memory may be sequentially ejected from the ejecting section 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, but may be, for example, the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21. Even with such a flow of payout processing, it is possible to detect the ejection of medals. However, in such a flow of the payout process, it is impossible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected next is pushed back by a medal that has bounced off the inner wall of the medal chute.
Note that the same step numbers are assigned to processes having the same contents in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Seventh embodiment>
This relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 attached to the inside of the cabinet 13 and the sub-control board 80 attached to the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 that is open on the front side, and a front door 12 that is attached so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
Further, the cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an open front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right side plate, a left side plate, a top plate, and the like.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is disposed at the lower inside of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). This medal dispensing device 15 is for dispensing medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. We are prepared.

Further, inside the cabinet 13, above the medal payout device 15, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided. A display device 14 is arranged.
Further, the symbol display device 14 includes a rectangular reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged in parallel inside this reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by a reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel board case 121 is arranged on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control board 120 is housed within this reel board case 121. This reel control board 120 controls the driving of three motors 32.

Further, a transparent main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed at a position above the symbol display device 14 on the front side of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 (inner surface side of the housing). The main control board 50 is housed within the main board case 56.
Further, the main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Furthermore, the main control board 50 is connected via the input port 51 or the output port 52 to a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a medal payout device 15, a reel control board 120, and a sub control board. 80 etc. are electrically connected.

Further, the front door 12 is attached to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13. More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. The opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed by rotating the front door 12 about this hinge.

Further, a transparent display window is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. The player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, etc. are arranged. .

Furthermore, at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, there is a medal payout port through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass, and a medal payout port for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port. A medal tray is arranged.
Further, at the upper part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, a production lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, etc. are arranged.

Further, a transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged at the upper part of the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed at a position on the back side of the front door 12 (inner surface side of the casing), above the symbol display device 14, and corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is housed within the sub-board case 87 .
Further, the sub control board 80 controls the performance, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Based on the control command received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect to output, and according to the decision, outputs the effect lamp 21, speaker 22, Controls the output of the image display device 23.

As described above, the main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14, and the main control board 50 is housed within the main board case 56.
Further, on the back surface of the front door 12, above the symbol display device 14, a sub-board case 87 is arranged, and the sub-control board 80 is housed within this sub-board case 87.
As shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is set to be wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

Here, on the sub-control board 80, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for power storage is arranged. Further, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 ruptures due to a malfunction, there is a risk that the filled electrolyte may be scattered. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when this electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction, the scattered electrolyte will be released. There is a possibility that it may adhere to the main CPU 55 and cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will be damaged due to the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, an electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the sub-control board 80.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered, the scattered electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 can be prevented from malfunctioning. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
Furthermore, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. By arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. Can be done.

FIG. 23(a) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing Example 1;
In FIG. 23A, the circle indicated by a broken line is the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50.

In example 1 shown in FIG. 23(a), there is one electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction, and in the horizontal direction It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
In this way, by arranging the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The electrolytic capacitor 86 can be located at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

<Modification of seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be two, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(b).
FIG. 23(b) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing Example 2.

Similarly to FIG. 23(a), in FIG. 23(b), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 is shown by a broken line.
In FIG. 23(b), the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both arranged at different positions in both the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Accordingly, also in Example 2 of FIG. 23(b), each of the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be four, for example, as shown in FIG. 24(c).
FIG. 24(c) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing Example 3.
The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected onto the main control board 50 and shown as a broken line circle, as in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b).

In FIG. 24(c), the sub-control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. It is located. Further, the remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction, although it is different in the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Even with this arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be placed at a position away from the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24(d) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing Example 4.
The projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 and showing it with a broken circle is the same as in FIGS. 23(a), (b), and FIG. 24(c).

In FIG. 24(d), similarly to FIG. 23(a), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, but unlike FIG. 23(a), the electrolytic capacitors on the sub-control board 80 86 is arranged at a position separate from the main control board 50.
In this way, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position away from the main control board 50, it can be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. There will be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23(a), (b), 24(c) and (d), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. By arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 in the position shown in FIG. You can prevent it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as a "role ratio monitor") is arranged on the main control board 50. This management information display LED 74 is for displaying management information such as advantageous section ratio, consecutive accessory ratio, accessory ratio, etc.
In addition, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section), and the "continuous role item ratio" means the ratio of the first section to the total number of medals acquired. It means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the special accessory (RB) is activated, and the "accessory ratio" means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals acquired.

Even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and also at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74, good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered, the scattered electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74 can be prevented. Information can be prevented from becoming unverifiable.
Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side sectional view of the lower front part of the housing of the slot machine 10 (section A in FIG. 22) with the front door 12 closed, and explains the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 25, the lower part of the cabinet 13 is provided with a first closing portion 13c that protrudes toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-shaped protrusion that protrudes forward from the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c extends in the protruding direction. is the direction toward the front door 12.
Further, the first closing portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position below the first closing portion 13c in the lower part of the front door 12, there is a second closing portion 12a that protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-shaped protrusion that projects rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the second closing portion 12a projects in the following direction. This is the cabinet 13 direction.

Further, the second closing portion 12a is arranged at a position lower than the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, like the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a is also formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position above the first closing portion 13c at the bottom of the front door 12, there is a third closing portion 12b that protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. is provided.
That is, like the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is a plate-shaped protrusion that projects rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing part 12b The protruding direction of the third closing portion 12b is the direction toward the cabinet 13.

Further, like the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, unlike the second closure part 12a, the third closure part 12b is arranged at a position above the first closure part 13c.
Furthermore, like the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is also formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the bottom of the housing is bent like the left and right sides of a U-shape are reversed, as shown in FIG. It will have a shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts (rogue acts) such as passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 into the inside of the casing to access the medal payout device 15 and the like.

Further, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. This door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Furthermore, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13 and is movable in the front and rear directions when the front door 12 is opened and closed. When the front door 12 is closed, this detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and
When 2 is open, it will pop forward due to the force of the spring.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where it is detecting the detection piece and is in an off state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is biased by the spring and pops out forward from inside the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where it is not detecting the detection piece and is in an on state.

The main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is on.
In this way, the opening and closing of the front door 12 is detected by the detection piece moving in the front-back direction as the front door 12 is opened and closed, and the door sensor being turned on and off.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed state, enters the door sensor and comes out, and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a "detection start position."
Further, the time when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 means the moment when the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.

In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion is located between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. 13c are arranged.
That is, even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state, the first blocking part 13c is disposed between the second blocking part 12a and the third blocking part 12b. It is formed like this.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first changes from the off state to the on state, and then the first blocking part 13c comes out from between the second blocking part 12a and the third blocking part 12b. It turns out.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open and sends a door open command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 receives the door open command. When the front door 12 is received, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. notify that the front door 12 is open. This makes it possible to notify the hall clerk that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open starts, the first closing part 13c does not come out from between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b, and the front door 12 opens. Even at the position where the notification starts, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 is in a bent shape. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (rogue acts) in which the medal dispensing device 15 or the like is accessed by passing the card through.

In the sixth embodiment, by stopping the holding part 102 that holds the first ejected medal between the first position and the second position, there is a space between two adjacent holding parts 102 on the hopper disk 101. A corresponding portion can be located in front of the discharge section 103,
Although it has been explained that this can prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like from the medal payout port and accessing the holding part 102 of the hopper disk 101, it has the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments. By doing so, it is possible to more firmly prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15.

Here, the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a is "h1", the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the third blocking part 12b is "h2", and the distance between the second blocking part 12a and the second blocking part 12a is "h2". Let the distance to the third blocking part 12b be "h3", and the protrusion width (depth) of the second blocking part 12a be "w".
Further, the diameter of the medal is "d", and the thickness of the medal is "t".
Note that the size of a typical medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". ing.

Here, when the hall clerk opens the front door 12 and replenishes the hopper 35 with medals, there is a case where the clerk drops the medals onto the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
In particular, in order to replenish the hopper 35 with medals from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, the medals may be dropped near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c.

At this time, if the setting is made so that "h2>t" is satisfied, even if the front door 12 is closed with the medals falling near the first blocking section 13c, the medals falling near the first blocking section 13c will still remain. , enters between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the front door 12 will not close due to medals being caught between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set to satisfy "w<(d/2)". has been done.
By setting so that "w<(d/2)" is satisfied, it is possible to prevent medals from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the medals placed on the second closing portion 12a from closing the front door. 12 and the cabinet 13 can be prevented from being damaged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, but the door sensor is not limited thereto, and may be configured using a proximity sensor, for example.
Even when a door sensor is configured using a proximity sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are detected not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. The structure is such that the first closing portion 13c is disposed between them.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 and is movable in the front and rear directions as the front door 12 is opened and closed. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, it pops out forward by being biased by the spring. So, I made it go out from inside the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor on the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 comes out from inside the door sensor. You may also do so.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side, but the door sensor is not limited thereto, and may be provided on the front door 12 side, for example.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is in an OFF state when it is detecting a detection piece, and is in an ON state when it is not detecting a detection piece. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be in an on state when it is detecting a detection piece, and may be in an off state when it is not detecting a detection piece. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. Configure it as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Further, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of two parts: a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a, and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a, or may be divided into three parts. It may be constructed from three members.
The second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may also be configured from two members or three members, similarly to the first closing portion 13c.
In this way, the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a, and the third closing part 12b are not limited to being composed of one member, but may be composed of a plurality of members.

Further, the first closing portion 13c does not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and, for example, the first closing portion 13c is provided near the right end or left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. It may have some parts that are not present.
Similarly, the lower back surface of the front door 12 may have a portion where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
In this way, even if there is a part where the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a, and the third closing part 12b are not provided, it is possible to enter the inside of the casing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as accessing the medal payout device 15 etc. by passing a wire or the like.
Further, the first closing portion 13c may be a part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be a part of the front door 12, or may be separate members from the front door 12.

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a, or the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, or the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Further, the entire first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, or a part of the first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. Good too.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c may be in contact with a position corresponding to between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b on the back surface of the front door 12. .
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing part 13c is provided that protrudes from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13, and a first closing part 13c is provided that projects from the lower part of the back surface of the cabinet 13 toward the front door 12 from a position below the first closing part 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. A protruding second closing portion 12a may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b may be provided that protrudes toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set to satisfy “h2>t”. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy "h2<t", for example.
If "h2>t" is set, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal falling near the first blocking part 13c, the medal falling near the first blocking part 13c will be removed from the third blocking part 13c. 12b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the front door 12 will not close due to medals being caught between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second blocking portion 12a and the medal diameter “d” is set to satisfy “w<(d/2)”. did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy "(d/2)<w<d", for example.
By satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Moreover, by satisfying "w<d", even if you try to close the front door 12 with a medal placed on the second blocking part 12a, the medal will be placed on the second blocking part 12a before the front door 12 closes. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a, and in turn allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(9) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d”, and the relationship between the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter. The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set to satisfy "(d/2)<w" and "h1<t".
As described above, by satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Furthermore, by satisfying "h1<t", even if you try to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second blocking part 12a, the medals will be placed on the second blocking part 12a before the front door 12 closes. The front door 12 does not close because the placed medal hits the front end of the first closing portion 13c.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a, and in turn allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(10) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d”, and the relationship between the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter. The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set to satisfy "d<w" and "h1>t".
By satisfying "d<w", the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closing part 12a without a part of the medal protruding from the second closing part 12a. Moreover, by satisfying "h1>t", a medal can be inserted between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second blocking part 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medal being placed between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a. It turns out. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Furthermore, there is no possibility that the medals placed on the second closing portion 12a will hit the first closing portion 13c or the front end of the cabinet 13, thereby preventing the front door 12 from closing.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Ninth embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side and control of output of effects on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing the types of special prizes (accessories) and ending conditions, and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state. (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the ninth embodiment, as special prizes (accessory objects), BB (first-class accessory continuous operating device; first-class big bonus), RB (first-class special accessory), ;Regular Bonus), and MB (Second Class Continuous Actuation Device; Second Class Big Bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Further, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

Moreover, MB is a device that can continuously operate CB (class 2 special accessory). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61, all the small winning combinations are won repeatedly, and the stop switch 42 is not operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment when the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Further, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26(b), in the ninth embodiment, there are seven gaming states: non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. There is. The main control board 50 then controls the transition of these gaming states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of medals inserted at which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the prescribed number during MB is set to "1", and the prescribed number in gaming states other than during MB is set to "3".

Further, "RT" means that the type (number) of conditional devices (accessories, replays, small winnings) to be selected as lottery targets and the winning probability thereof are a unique lottery state.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but it means that the type of conditional device to be selected for lottery and its winning probability are different from RT.
In any game state, when the RT start condition is satisfied, the next game is shifted to RT, and when the RT end condition is satisfied in RT, the next game is shifted to non-RT.

Furthermore, when a special prize is won, the winning information of the special prize is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special prize stops on the active line.
A game in which a special role has not been won is called a "non-internal" game, and a game in which a special role has been won but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role has not stopped on the active line, that is, a special role has been won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal play."

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol can be stopped on the active line from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving pieces) rate (PB).
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (with an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on an active line within the range of the maximum number of moving pieces), the target symbol will be stopped on an active line (an effective timing). PB≠1 means that it is not possible to pull the ball up to the line.
On the other hand, no matter what position the reels 31 are at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), it is possible to always stop (draw) the target symbol on the active line. It is called "PB=1".

Furthermore, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game starts from the next game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases as the RB game is executed continuously. Then, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before shifting to the BB game.
Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on the active line, the winning information on the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which BB winning information is carried over is called "BB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game where the BB was won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the BB, and in the game where the BB was won, the reels may not be moved to the inside of the BB, but in the next game, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the BB. You may move it inside.

Furthermore, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the active line (RB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the RB game starts from the next game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. When the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the RB game.
Furthermore, when an RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which RB winning information is carried over is called "RB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the RB can be set as appropriate, similar to the timing of transition to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the RB interior, or in the game in which the RB is won, the RB is not moved to the interior, and in the next game, the RB is You may move it inside.

Furthermore, when the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line (MB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the MB game starts from the next game.
During the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the MB game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which MB winning information is carried over is called "MB internal".
In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1", so if MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the current game will always stop on the active line. , will never be inside the MB.

Moreover, the conditional device (win) of the ninth embodiment can be broadly classified into a special winning combination (accessory object), a replay (replay winning combination), and a small winning combination.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles: BB, RB, and MB, two types of replays: Replay 1 and Replay 2, and minor roles: common bell, left correct answer bell, and middle correct answer bell. , right correct answer has seven types: bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2.
Note that the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell are collectively referred to as the "push order bell."
Furthermore, the "condition device" is a device that operates in accordance with the winning number determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more conditional devices corresponding to that winning number are activated, and the winning flag corresponding to the activated conditional device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, any one winning number from "0" to "16" is determined by a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the winning number corresponds to the determined winning number. Any conditional device from non-winning to MB is activated.
In the two types of replays, both win individually and do not overlap with other conditional devices (combinations).
Furthermore, there are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell, all of which can be won individually and cannot be won in combination with other winning combinations.

Furthermore, there are cases in which watermelon is won alone and cases in which watermelon is won in combination with BB.
Furthermore, Cherry 1 has cases where it wins alone and cases where it wins multiple times with BB, and Cherry 2 has cases where it wins alone, cases where it wins multiple times with RB, and cases where it wins multiple times with BB. .
Also, BB has cases where it wins alone and cases where it wins multiple times with Watermelon, Cherry 1, or Cherry 2, but RB never wins alone and only wins multiple times with Cherry 2, and MB can only be won individually, and cannot be won in combination with other roles.

Further, "payout" means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each conditional device is stopped (a winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell, the payout is different depending on the specified number 3 (gaming state other than during MB) and the specified number 1 (in MB), but other than that, The payout is the same for the specified number 3 and the specified number 1.

In addition, the left correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the first stop on the left is the correct answer press order, and the first stop on the left is the incorrect answer press order, and with the specified number of 3, 8 medals will be paid out in the correct answer press order. , one medal will be paid out in the order of incorrect presses, and if the specified number is 1, 14 medals will be paid out in the order of correct presses, and 15 medals will be paid out in the order of incorrect presses.
Similarly, the middle correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the first stop in the middle is the correct answer press order, and the first stop in the middle is the incorrect answer press order, and the right correct answer bell is a press order bell in which the first stop in the middle is the correct answer press order. , is a push order bell in which any other than the first stop on the right is an incorrect push order.
Note that the common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the order in which it is pressed.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). This winning combination lottery means 61 performs a lottery of winning numbers. Then, when a winning number is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Further, the lottery of winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one of the winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. Furthermore, winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to condition devices "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. Then, when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined, the "Replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Furthermore, when the winning number "8" is determined, the "Watermelon+BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" is activated.
As explained in the first embodiment, the winning combination lottery means 61 includes a random number generation means, a random number extraction means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a random number extraction means based on the random number extracted by the random number extraction means. and a winning number determining means for determining a winning number, and when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
For example, in non-internal and internal cases, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means may be the same and the operating condition device may be the same, or even if the random number extracted by the random number extraction means is the same, the operating condition may be the same. The conditions and equipment used may differ.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. This winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of lottery of winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. Then, when a winning number is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets a winning flag). .

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61, the winning flag of "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is The winning flag will be turned on, and the other winning flags will be turned off.
Similarly, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10"" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, winning information for roles other than special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, so even if you win a role that does not carry over winning information in this game and the winning flag for that role is turned on, that role will not be carried over. Regardless of whether the player wins or not, the winning flag is turned off at the end of the current game.
On the other hand, the winning information for special roles (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, so if you win a special role in the current game and the winning flag of the winning special role is turned on, that special role will be The winning flag remains on until a prize is won, and when the special winning combination is won, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" The two winning flags will be turned on, but if "BB" does not win in this game, "Cherry 1" will be turned on at the end of the current game, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" won in this game or not. The winning flag for "1" is turned off, and the winning flag for "BB" remains on. In this case, from the next game onwards, the game will move to inside the BB.

Also, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 within BB, in addition to the winning flag of "BB" carried over, "Cherry" corresponding to the winning number "9" is added. The winning flag of "Cherry 1" included in the condition device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags "Cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
Therefore, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB"), and when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside BB, ” (“Cherry 1” wins alone), the on/off state of the winning flag is the same.

Also, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 controls the winning flags of all the small winning combinations (common bell, left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). turn on. For this reason, even though the winning combination was not won by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, it is in the same state as winning all the small winning combinations.
For example, during a MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the lottery by the winning number lottery means 61, the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0" does not include any winning numbers, but all The winning flag for the small winning combination (the above seven small winning combinations) is turned on.
Also, for example, during a MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Replay 1" included in the "Replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the winning flag, the winning flags of all the small winnings (the seven small winnings mentioned above) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a reel control means 65, and this reel control means 65 has a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to on/off of the winning flag. Equipped with Further, each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
When a winning number is determined by a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to on/off of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.
In addition, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of Replay 1 is on and the winning flags other than Replay 1 are off is such that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 stops on the active line, and The stopping position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to combinations other than Replay 1 do not stop on the active line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table that is selected when the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct answer bell are off is the stop position determination table that is selected when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left stop. , when the symbol combination that results in the payout of 8 medals stops on the active line, and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the first stop on the left, the symbol combination that results in the payout of 1 medal stops on the active line. The stopping position of each reel 31 is determined as follows.

Further, the "internal lottery number" column in FIG. 26(c) shows the number of winning numbers in each gaming state. Divide the internal lottery number by "65536" to get the probability of winning.
For example, since the winning number "4" in non-RT is set to "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the number "4" corresponding to the winning number "4" is The probability that the conditional device of "correct answer bell" will operate is "3000/65536".

Further, in the column of "internal lottery number" in FIG. 26(c), the mark "*" indicates that advantageous section lottery is executable.
Here, the "advantageous section" means a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be activated).
Further, the "instruction function" refers to a function of displaying (notifying) an "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
Furthermore, "activation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is selected.

Furthermore, "advantageous section lottery" means a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section.
Then, when winning in the advantageous section lottery and moving to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and when the push order bell is won, it becomes possible to notify the correct push order.
For example, the number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*", but this is because in non-RT the winning number "3"("commonbell") is marked "*". When the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined in the lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT, when the winning number "0" (non-winning) is determined, and when the winning number "4" to "6"("left correct answer bell", " When it is determined that the answer is "Middle Correct Answer Bell" or "Right Correct Answer Bell", the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but otherwise the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Furthermore, within RT, RB, and BB, when the winning number is determined to be "4" to "6"("left correct bell", "middle correct bell", or "right correct bell"), Except for non-RT, when the winning number is determined to be the same as the non-RT, advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, since BB's winning information is carried over within BB, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined while inside BB, and when it is determined to be a winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") during BB, and during non-RT (non-internal). The on/off state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning number "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1+BB") is determined.
Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in BB internal are set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within RB, the winning flag of "Cherry 1" and the carried over winning flag of "RB" are turned on. .
Furthermore, "BB" and "RB" are both special prizes (official objects). The number set and the number set for the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in the RB are set to the same number "200".
Therefore, even when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within the RB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") or winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") is determined as a non-RT, and if you win while inside RB or inside BB. This is the same as when the number "11"("Cherry2" wins alone) is determined in that the winning flag of "Cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special prize (official object) are turned on.
Furthermore, if you add up the numbers of winning numbers "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") and winning numbers "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT, it will be "300", and RB internal middle and BB It matches the number ``300'' of the winning number ``11'' (single winning of ``Cherry 2'') in the inside.
Therefore, even when the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined in the RB or the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, the column of “advantageous section lottery number” in FIG. 26(c) shows the number of winning numbers for each winning number. Divide the number of advantageous section drawings by "16384" to get the probability of winning.
For example, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, RB inside, or BB inside, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is as follows. It becomes "20/16384".
For example, in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is "10000/16384". ”.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), MB lottery is held in non-RT and RT, but if MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the current game always stops on the active line, so MB To shift to an MB game from the next game without becoming internal.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), during the MB game, the lottery of Replay 1 or Replay 2 is held, and regardless of the lottery result by the prize lottery means 61, all minor prizes are won twice. Become.

Therefore, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all the small roles (common bell, left correct bell, center bell) The seven winning flags (correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 2" and the winning flags of all small winning combinations are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all small roles are turned on. In this case, the same stop position determination table is selected as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on. However, during the MB game, the specified number is 1 (one coin is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT, and the payout is 14 or 15 coins.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first stop on the left (when the pressing order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination that results in a payout of 15 medals stops on the active line and the stop switch 42 is operated at a position other than the first stop on the left (when the push order is incorrect), the symbol combination that results in a payout of 15 medals stops on the active line. Stop at active line.

Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during MB gaming, the same stop position determination table is selected as when only the winning flag of the right correct answer bell is on, and the right At the first stop (when the pressing order is correct), 14 pieces are paid out, and at times other than the first stop on the right (when the pressing order is incorrect), 15 pieces are paid out.
Then, in the first game during the MB game, a press order that results in a payout of 14 coins is reported, and in the second game during the MB game, a press order that results in a payout of 15 coins is reported.
As mentioned above, the condition for ending the MB game is set when the number of medals paid out exceeds 14, so by making such a notification, 29 medals will be paid out during the MB game. You can do it like this. Furthermore, since the specified number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can obtain 27 medals, which is the sum of the payout number "29" minus the input number "2".

Furthermore, in order to notify the player of a pressing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to an advantageous section.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "15" (single winning of "MB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning of the advantageous section lottery The probability is set to "16384/16384", that is, "100%".

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the effect group number selection means 64. This effect group number selection means 64 is for selecting the effect group number corresponding to the winning number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26(c), the performance group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. Specifically, production group numbers "0" to "3" are determined in correspondence with winning numbers "0" to "3", and production group numbers "4" and "4" are determined in correspondence to winning numbers "4" to "6". '' are determined, and production group numbers ``5'' to ``13'' are determined corresponding to winning numbers ``7'' to ``15''.
Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a push order instruction number selection means 63. This pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects the determined winning numbers when the winning numbers corresponding to the pressing order bells (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell) are determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. This is for selecting the pressing order instruction number (corresponding to the correct pressing order) corresponding to the pressing order.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a control command transmitting means 71. The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the production output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 sends, as control commands, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, a push order instruction number (when the AT is in progress and when the correct answer is pressed). In addition to information such as the winning number (only when the winning number corresponding to the condition device with the , inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB), the presentation group number, etc. are transmitted to the sub control board 80.

As a result, the sub-control board 80 side judges the gaming state on the main control board 50 side and the condition devices (excluding the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell) operating in the winning combination lottery means 61. be able to.
In addition, on the sub-control board 80 side, it can be determined that the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, or right correct answer bell has been won based on the performance group number, but the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, or right correct answer bell It is not possible to determine which one of them won (in which order the correct answer was pressed).
Further, during AT, the correct pressing order can be notified by the pressing order instruction number.

Further, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects during the game and while waiting for the game.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) sends information (necessary for outputting effects) to the sub-control board 80 in one direction. control command).
Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 is equipped with a performance output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 is equipped with a performance determination table and the like.
Further, a plurality of performance determination tables are provided that define the performance to be output, and the performance output control means 91 determines the performance to be output using any of the performance determination tables, and determines the performance to be output using one of the performance determination tables. control to output.
That is, the effect output control means 91 determines at what timing and what effect to output based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and one of the effect determination tables, and determines what effect to output at what timing. Accordingly, the outputs of the production lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 are controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a production determination table used in both non-RT (non-interior) and RT (non-AT and non-interior), and FIG. 28 is a production determination table commonly used in RB interior and BB interior. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, there are 18 types of presentation patterns ranging from "no presentation" to "continuous presentation". Furthermore, each production pattern from "Character Production (Enthusiasm)" to "Continuous Production" defines production with different content.
For example, the "confirmation performance" is a performance that lets the player know that he or she has won the special prize, and the "post-first-stop notification performance" is a performance after the first stop (after the first operation of the stop switch 42). It is a performance that is output at a timing, and the "left first stop performance" is a performance that instructs that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first, and the "continuous performance" is a performance that is output continuously over multiple games. This is the effect that is output.

Further, the column "Number of performance patterns distributed" in FIG. 27 shows the number of distribution patterns of each performance pattern when each performance group number is received. Dividing the number of performance patterns distributed by "256" gives the selection probability of each performance pattern. In addition, in FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding conditional device is written below each performance group number.
For example, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined in a lottery by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the production group number "1" is transmitted, the probability of selecting "no production" is "128/256", the selection probability of "Character production (liveliness)" is "20/256", the selection probability of "Conversation production (liveliness)" is also "20/256", and the selection probability of "Cut-in production" is "20/256". The selection probability of ``(strong effect)'' is ``0/256''.

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 sends information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB) to the sub-control board 80; Send the production group number.
Then, the performance output control means 91 of the sub-control board 80 selects a performance determination table according to the gaming state based on the information indicating the gaming state received from the main control board 50, and combines the selected performance determination table with the main Based on the performance group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which performance pattern to output the performance, and the outputs of the performance lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 are controlled according to the determination.

Here, in non-RT (non-internal), if the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number "12" is transmitted, the production output is The control means 91 selects the performance determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT and RT (non-AT), and changes the position in the column of performance group number "12" (single winning of "BB") in this performance determination table. The number is used to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" is won alone in non-RT, "continuous performance" is selected with a probability of "40/256", for example.

On the other hand, if the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 within the BB and the production group number "0" is transmitted, the production output control means 91 will: Select the performance determination table shown in FIG. 28 that is used for both RB internal and BB internal, and use the number placed in the performance group number "0"("non-winning") column in this performance determination table to select which production. Decide whether to output the pattern performance. As shown in FIG. 28, when there is a "non-winning" within the BB, the "confirmed performance" is selected with a probability of "80/256", for example.
In this way, the performance output control means 91 controls the game in which "BB" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside) and the game in which "BB" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 during inside BB. A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table for each game. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, in non-RT, when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side The winning flag of "BB" included in the condition device of "BB" corresponding to " is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "BB-only stop position determination table."

The "stop position determination table for single BB" is used to stop each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line, and so that the symbol combination corresponding to combinations other than BB does not stop on the active line. determining the position.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch 42 based on the "BB single stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number is "0"("non-winning") in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 selects the carried-over "BB". Keep the winning flag on and turn off the other winning flags. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same "BB single stop position determination table" is selected as when "BB" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT.
For this reason, when it becomes "non-winning" in the winning combination lottery means 61 in BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when "BB" is won alone in the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. Furthermore, "stop control of the same reels 31 is performed" means that if each stop switch 42 is operated in the same manner (pressing order and operation timing), each reel 31 will stop at the same position, and the same reel 31 will stop at the same position. This means that the stopping number will be displayed.

In this way, the main control board 50 side has the same result when "BB" is won alone by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "BB" is "not won" by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside BB. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the stop position determination table, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different performance determination table is used to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, and effects can be diversified.
In addition, even if the same reel 31 is controlled to stop on the main control board 50 side and the same stop number is displayed, different effects are output on the sub control board 80 side, so it is possible to win a special prize. It is possible to enable the player to guess that the player is in the middle of the game.

Furthermore, by selecting different effect determination tables on the sub-control board 80 side for when "BB" is won alone in non-RT and when "not won" inside BB, "BB" in non-RT can be won alone. When winning, a performance determination table with a low probability of selecting a confirmed performance (a performance that lets the player know that he has won the BB) is selected, and when there is a "non-winning" within the BB, a performance with a high probability of selecting a confirmed performance is selected. A decision table can be selected.
As a result, in the game in which "BB" was won, it is difficult for the player to understand that "BB" has been won, and inside the BB, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the "BB" has been won. By making it easy for players to understand, it is possible to make the player aim to win the "BB" and to prevent the player from staying in the BB forever, thereby preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

In addition, in non-RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number "6" is transmitted, the production output control means 91: Select the effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and win the duplicate effect group number "6" ("watermelon + BB") in this effect determination table. ) is used to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "Watermelon + BB" double wins in non-RT, for example, there is a probability of "50/256" that "Character production (Enjoyment)", "Conversation production (Enjoyment)", or "Cut-in production ( ``Strong effect)'' and select ``Continuous effect'' with a probability of ``30/256''.

On the other hand, if the winning number "7" (single winning of "Watermelon") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 within the BB and the production group number "5" is transmitted, the production output control means 91 , select the performance determination table shown in FIG. 28 that is used in both RB internal and BB internal, and use the number set in the performance group number "5" (single winning of "Watermelon") column in this performance determination table. , determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 28, when "Watermelon" is won alone in the BB, for example, "Character production (Enjoyment)" or "Conversation production (Enjoyment)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and "20 Select a continuous performance with a probability of "/256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 controls the game in which "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), and the game in which "Watermelon" is won independently by the winning combination lottery means 61 during BB inside. The performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table depending on the game played. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, during non-internal play, in order to maintain the player's expectations for winning "BB" for a long time by showing the player a continuous performance that spans multiple games, the continuous performance can be selected when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice. The probability is set high.
On the other hand, during BB, if the player is shown a continuous performance that spans multiple games, the winning of "BB" will be delayed and the player's medals will decrease, so "Watermelon" can be won individually. The probability of selecting a continuous performance at the time is set low, and the selection probability of the confirmed performance at the time of ``non-winning'' is set high in order to make the player aim for winning the ``BB'' prize early.
Note that the probability of winning each role and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning may be set in the BB so that the player's medals do not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous performance may be set high.

In addition, in non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side , the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" included in the "Watermelon + BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "watermelon+BB overlapping stop position determination table."

"Watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" is designed to allow symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon or BB to stop on active lines, and to prevent symbol combinations corresponding to roles other than watermelon and BB from stopping on active lines. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch based on the "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stopping position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "Watermelon") is determined in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 selects the carried-over winning number "7". While keeping the winning flag of "BB" on, in addition, turn on the winning flag of "Watermelon" included in the condition device of "Watermelon" corresponding to winning number "7", and win "Watermelon" and "BB". " Winning flags other than "" will be turned off. As a result, the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same "Watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" as when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.

Therefore, when "Watermelon" is won alone by the winning combination lottery means 61 while inside BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. .
In this way, on the main control board 50 side, when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "Watermelon" is won independently by the winning combination lottery means 61 during BB, The same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different performance determination table is used to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, when you win "Cherry 1 + BB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 1" alone in BB, when you win "Watermelon + BB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 1" alone in BB, As in the case of winning "Watermelon" alone, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control board 80 side uses a different effect determination table. Use this to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

Furthermore, when you win "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 2" alone in BB or RB, you can win "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT. In the same way as when a "watermelon" is won multiple times or when "Watermelon" is won individually in the BB, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control On the board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so it is possible to diversify the effects.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the number of allocations for each performance pattern is the same when "Watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "Watermelon" is won alone in BB. Therefore, the selection probabilities for each performance pattern are the same.
However, when "Watermelon" is won alone in non-RT, the winning flag of "Watermelon" is on and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off. When "Watermelon" is won alone while inside BB, the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on, and when the other winning flags are off, select the corresponding stop position determination table. do. Therefore, the stop control of the reels 31 is different when a "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT and when a "watermelon" is won alone in the BB.
In this way, on the sub-control board 80 side, the selection probability of each performance pattern is the same when "Watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "Watermelon" is won alone in BB. , the stop control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

As explained above, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same. Therefore, when the same conditional device is activated, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) is the same. ) may be different.

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the same conditions are met. When the device operates, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each gaming state, but the selection probabilities of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) may be different. .

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the same condition device When activated, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) for each game state is the same, but the selection probability of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) may be different.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) Types of combinations shown in the ninth embodiment, types of conditional devices, types of gaming states, prescribed numbers in each gaming state, payout when each winning combination, allocation of internal lottery numbers, advantageous section lottery settings The allocation of the number, the type of performance pattern, the allocation of the allocated number of each performance pattern, etc. are merely examples, and can be set as appropriate depending on the game content.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1 was shown, but six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided as setting values, and each setting value has a different internal drawing. A number table for lottery and advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the gaming state and the production group number to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 side judges the gaming state and condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects a production pattern with a probability according to the gaming state and condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit to the sub-control board 80 a winning number determined by an internal lottery, or transmit information indicating a condition device corresponding to a winning number determined by an internal lottery. Good too. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the received winning number and information indicating the condition device.

Further, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating the condition device determined by internal lottery and information on the winning combination. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, if the sub control board 80 receives information indicating that "BB" has won, but does not receive information indicating that "BB" has won, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side will change. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the gaming state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side and information indicating the performance group number, winning number, and condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side You may also select a performance pattern.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination and information on the winning combination. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the gaming state and condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating whether the winning flag is on/off and the information on the winning combination.
For example, if information indicating that the winning flag of "BB" is on is received, but information indicating that "BB" has won is not received, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side is in the BB internal state. It can be determined that

In addition, since the lottery for "BB" is not performed while inside the BB, when information indicating that only the winning flag for "BB" is on is received while inside the BB, the internal lottery is performed on the main control board 50 side. It can be determined that the winning number "0"("non-winning") has been determined.
Then, based on the gaming state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side also determined on the sub control board 80 side, the production pattern is created on the sub control board 80 side. may be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, "single winning" is used to mean winning only the roles other than the special role, and not winning the special roles at the same time, and "multiple winning" means winning only the roles other than the special role. , is used to mean that the special role and other roles other than the special role are won at the same time.
For example, the winning of "Watermelon + Control Role 1" in the BB is a double win in the sense that multiple types of roles are won at the same time, but it is only won for roles other than the special role, and the special role is Since they are not elected at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, this is a single election.

In addition, on the main control board 50 side, when "Watermelon + Control role 1 + BB" is won (duplicate winning) in non-inside, and when "Watermelon + Control role 1" is won (single winning) in BB inside, Since the on/off state of the winning flag is the same, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stopping position determination table, but since the winning number and presentation group number are different, on the sub control board 80 side, A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table.
In addition, the "control combination" is a combination for changing the stop position determination table to be selected by changing the on/off state of the winning flag, thereby changing the stop control of the reels 31, and making it possible to win a prize. It's not a role for you.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined in the RB or BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed. When winning a winning combination that overlaps with a special winning combination, the advantageous section lottery may not be executed.
(7) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Tenth embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to control of the display of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting changing), setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on (for example, when power is turned on, when starting interrupt processing for the first time, when starting a program, etc.). (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation), in the RWM abnormal error state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are controlled to be in a lighting state.
As described in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 is composed of four-digit LEDs, so when all the LEDs are lit, "8888" is displayed. This makes it possible to check whether there is any problem with the LED of the management information display LED 74.

Further, when the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the device shifts to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. Further, when the setting change state is entered, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
The 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on power-on is set to be longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state if the setting key switch is turned on at power-on. There is.

Here, for example, suppose that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to be shorter than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. In this case, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are first turned on, then the management information is once displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that the manager (the hall clerk) may suspect that there is some sort of malfunction with the gaming machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
Note that the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, but may be any period of time that is longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. It may be set to

The test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be further explained below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs included in the management information display LED 74 are referred to as "digit 6,""digit7,""digit8," and "digit 9" in order from the left.
Furthermore, among the four-digit LEDs that the management information display LED 74 has, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are called "identification segments", and the two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are called "ratio segment". It is called "Seg."

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of identification segment Digit 7: Lower digit of identification segment Digit 8: Upper digit of ratio segment Digit 9: Lower digit of ratio segment.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED consisting of segments A to G and segment DP.

The test pattern display on the management information display LED 74 is performed to confirm whether all segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly lit and extinguished. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have a lit state and a non-lit state.
Further, when displaying the test pattern on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the specified timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) Settings being changed (mode) (4) Settings being confirmed (mode) (5) RWM abnormal error in progress

As a test pattern, firstly, a predetermined display is switched every second and displayed for 5 seconds. Note that the time for maintaining one display is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of a test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (any time other than 5 seconds is sufficient).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs are in a lit state and in a non-lit state during the 5 seconds which is the display time of the test pattern.
A second test pattern is to blink all segments of all LEDs. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one blink (on and off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display on the management information display LED 74.
In the test pattern displays of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, lit segments are shown by solid lines, and unlit segments are shown by dotted lines. Furthermore, in the segment DP, the lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and the response to turning off the light is indicated by a white circle.
In the following description, "." indicates that the segment DP is in a lit state, and "." indicates that the segment DP is in a non-lit state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display for each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern that displays "0.". More specifically, this is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are lit, and segment G is turned off.
The other pattern is to display "-." More specifically, the pattern is such that segment G is lit and segments A to F and DP are off.
Therefore, "0." and "-." have an inverse relationship between lit and unlit segments, respectively.

In the state shown in FIG. 29(a), "0." is displayed in the upper digits of the identification segment and the upper digits of the ratio segment, and "-." is displayed in the lower digits of the identification segment and the lower digits of the ratio segment.
Furthermore, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29(a) is maintained for one second. Note that the count for one second may be measured by the number of interrupt processing. For example, when you start the display in Figure 29(a), you set "447(D)" in the counter, and subtract "1" for each interrupt process, and when it reaches "0", An example of this is a) ending the display. As a result, for "2.235 x 447 = 999.045 ms", Fig. 29 (a
) can be maintained.

When the display for about 1 second in FIG. 29(a) ends, the display shifts to the display in FIG. 29(b).
Furthermore, the display in FIG. 29(b) is the display in FIG. 29(a) in which the LED displaying "0." and the LED displaying "-." are replaced. That is, in the display of FIG. 29(b), contrary to the display of FIG. 29(a), "-." is displayed in the upper digits of the identification segment and the upper digits of the ratio segment, and "-." is displayed in the lower digits of the identification segment and the lower digits of the ratio segment. is displayed as "0.".
Furthermore, as in the case of FIG. 29(a), the display state shown in FIG. 29(b) continues for one second (447 interrupt).

The display contents of FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b) are switched and displayed every second, and this is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display content as (a), and (d) has the same display content as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (5 seconds) ends, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous section ratio is displayed as "7.U.5.0.". Further, instead of the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio may be displayed.

As described above, when "0." and "-." are displayed on the LED, it is possible to create lighting states and non-lighting states for all segments (A to G and DP), so segment failure (lighting (or the lights cannot be turned off) can be easily determined visually.
Further, when displaying a ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment displays "0.-." or "-.0.". Therefore, there is no possibility of confusing the test pattern with the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a second example of test pattern display on the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display contents were changed every second and the test pattern was displayed for 5 seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from setting change start processing.
On the other hand, example 2 of the test pattern display shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying the test pattern until a predetermined termination condition is met, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error. .
It goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used to display the test pattern until a predetermined end condition is met.
Similarly, it goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used to display the test pattern display within a predetermined period after the test pattern display start condition is satisfied.

In example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are lit, and "*" is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *.*.*."("*" indicates that segments A to G are off) are repeated alternately. In other words, this is a pattern in which "8.8.8.8." is displayed blinking.
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, all segments are kept lit for 0.3 seconds as shown in FIG. 30(a), and then all segments are kept off for 0.3 seconds as shown in FIG. 30(b). Then, by repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30(a) and the light-off state shown in FIG. 30(b), a blinking state is obtained.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, if you set "134 (D)" as the initial value of the timer, and subtract "1" from the timer value every 2.235ms of interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or It is determined that the lights-out time has passed. Thereby, by counting the number of interrupts "134", it is possible to count "299.49" ms.

Also in the second example of the test pattern display in FIG. 30, by using "8." and "*.", it is possible to create a lit state and a non-lit state for all segments. Therefore, segment failure (unable to turn on or turn off) can be easily determined visually.
Further, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment displays "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display will blink regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." will be displayed and the segment DP will not light up. On the other hand, when displaying "8.8.", the segment DP is also lit, so there is no confusion between the two.

Note that each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all the reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has ended). Then, in subsequent interrupt processing, the updated ratio is displayed. If a power outage occurs immediately before the ratio is updated and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is restored, the ratio will be updated (calculated) during the 5 seconds that the test pattern is displayed. Execute. Then, when the test pattern display ends and the ratio display starts, the updated ratio is displayed after the power is restored from the power-off.

<Eleventh embodiment>
FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Moreover, the same figure (C) is a figure which shows the setting value display LED73 in 11th Embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31(A), the credit display LED 76 is composed of digit 1a (upper digit) and digit 2a (lower digit). The acquisition number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3a (upper digit) and digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, "digit" means a display section (display), and in particular, in this embodiment, it is composed of seven segment LEDs (so-called 7 segments).
These digits 1a to 4a are all seven segment displays with dot segments (segment P). In particular, the segment P of digit 4a (lower digit of the number-of-achievement display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79. In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 are shown, but the status display LED 79 is not shown. However, in reality, as shown in FIG. 31(A), a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are mounted on the display board 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs that each display the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the one bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, and 3-bet display LED 79c are all configured to light up.

Moreover, the game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when medals are inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when medals are not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, the light is lit before the game ends and the medals for the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Note that even after the replay has been activated, it lights up when a bet is possible according to the number of credits. Then, when the number of bets is the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay win is made, and when an automatic bet is made based on a replay win, the replay display LED 79f lights up to inform the player that an automatic bet state is in place.
Note that the status display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31(A) includes, for example, a payment display LED (an LED that lights up during payment processing), but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 31(A).

Further, in FIG. 31(B), the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29, and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b-4b, like the above-mentioned digits 1a-4a, are a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P). Digits 1b to 4b indicate the upper information type, the lower information type, the higher numerical value, and the lower numerical value, respectively.
Further, the segment P of digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly mark the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Further, the segments P of digits 1b to 4b can be lit when displaying a test pattern, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31(C), the setting value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. ) consists of digit 5b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in this embodiment.
The 7-segment digit is composed of 7 bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment P. Note that an LED consisting of segments A to G without segment P may be referred to as "7 segments", and an LED consisting of 8 segments including segment P may be referred to as "8 segments"; however, in this specification, In the book, the term ``7-segment'' includes an LED made up of eight segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, of the digit 1a, segments A to G constitute the seven upper digit segments of the credit number display LED 76, and segment P is unused. Similarly, each of segments A to G of digits 2a and 3a constitutes 7 segments of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the earned number display LED 78, and segment DP is unused.
Furthermore, the segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute the seven lower digit segments of the acquisition number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.

Digit 5a is an LED that constitutes status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to the 1 bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to the 2 bet display LED 79b, . . . segment F corresponds to the replay display LED 79f. Furthermore, segments G and P of digit 5a are not provided.

Digits 1b to 4b constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display information types of management information. Furthermore, segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 1b and 2b among the management information. Segments P of digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally off, but are lit when a test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator display LED for making the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value clear and facilitating confirmation. Note that while the above-described test pattern is being displayed, the digit separator display LED may be repeatedly turned on and off like the segments P of other digits, or it may be kept on all the time.

Furthermore, among the digits 5b, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the set value display LED 73, and segment P is an LED that lights up during a setting change. That is, when the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is off, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that the segment P of the setting value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to this usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during a setting change.

Further, FIG. 32 illustrates the structure of segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, and the D0 bit corresponds to segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to segment B, . . . , and the D7 bit corresponds to segment P.
For example, when displaying "0" in digit 1a, segments A to F are turned on and segments G and P are turned off, so the segment data becomes "00111111(B)".

Furthermore, when displaying "1" in the digit 4a and lighting up the advantageous section display LED 77, segments B, C, and P are lit, so the segment data becomes "10000110 (B)."
Furthermore, before the game starts, when three medals are bet and the game can be started, the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are lit. The segment data of 5a is "00001111(B)".

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that the types of output ports are not limited to those shown in FIG. 33.
As the output ports 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port (output port 2) that transmits a digit signal and two output ports (output ports 3 and 4) that transmit segment signals are provided. .
Output port 3 is an output port that transmits segment signals of credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, and status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
Further, the output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73.

In output port 2, digit 1 to 5 signals are assigned to bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digits 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from the D0 bit of output port 2, both digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper digit)) are output. A drive signal is provided.

Furthermore, in output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
Output port 3 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1a to 5a, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Similarly, output port 4 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1b to 5b, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Furthermore, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal input signal, and a medal payout signal.

Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100. Specifically, for example, the advantageous section, AT, specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is in operation, and external signal 4 indicating that an error has occurred in the slot machine 10 or a power outage has occurred, etc. , an external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

Further, the data strobe signal is a signal sent to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the data strobe signal, it controls the sub-control data signal to be acquired from the buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rise of the data strobe signal.
Note that from output ports (not shown) other than output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. 33, signals from the motor 32, signals from the blocker 45, drive signals from the hopper motor 36, and conditional device signals (so-called winning numbers) are output. , sub-control data signals, test signals, etc. are output.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In this embodiment, the main control board 50 processes a main process (M_MAIN) (described later in FIG. 41) that is performed for each game, and an interrupt process (M_MAIN) that is performed once every 2.235 ms in parallel with this main process. I_INTR) (FIG. 53, which will be described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is a 1-byte data counter that is continuously updated every interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is to be lit. Regarding each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to a digit 1 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to a digit 2 signal, . . . , the D4 bit is assigned to a digit 5 signal. In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is "1" on the LED display counter is lit.

The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter is updated by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter value by one digit to the right as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" and so on (for each interrupt). In addition, in FIG. 34, at the next interrupt after interrupt "5", the LED display counter is shifted to the right by one digit and becomes "00000000 (B)", but at the time of the interrupt, initialization processing of the LED display counter is performed, Set the LED display counter to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the value "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
“N+1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N+4” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+6” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the eleventh embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are lit. Specifically, in FIG. 34(A), for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, digits 5a and 5b can be lit. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the setting value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78 and the numerical lower digits of the management information display LED 74 can be lit. .

Moreover, FIG. 34(B) is a diagram showing the data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit that is permitted to be lit. As shown in FIG. 34(B), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0 bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag is made to match the bit of output port 2.
As shown in Figure 34(B), digits 1 to 5 can be lit during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be lit while changing settings, and digits 1 to 5 can be lit while checking settings. be. In addition. “Normal” refers to waiting for games and during games.

Then, in the interrupt process, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that lights up in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal medium)", if you AND the two, it will be "00010000 (B)" and the digit 5 Only the signal becomes "1". However, during normal operation (while waiting for the game and during the game), the segment signal is output from the output port 3 and the status display LED 79 can be lit, but the segment signal is not output from the output port 4 and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is controlled so as not to light up.

On the other hand, during a setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal turns on (LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4 and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is turned on. Enables lighting.
Also, while changing the settings, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal turns on (LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED 78) (upper digit) and digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output, and the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88" (contents indicating that the setting is being changed).

Furthermore, when generating the segment signal of output port 3 at the interrupt timing when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)" (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34), the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. To do this. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and "10000000 (B)" is outputted from the output port 3 as a segment signal. Thereby, segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of digit 4a can be lit.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, names, and contents of data stored in the RWM 53.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in explaining the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address “F000(H)” is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the set value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the set value data.
The set value display LED 73 displays "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, as the set value.

Address “F010(H)” is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data.
Here, in this embodiment, a value obtained by converting the number of credits into a decimal number is stored as the number of credits data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example). , is data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the stored data values are in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data of the credit number display LED 76.

Address “F011(H)” is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the acquisition number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits. It is data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small winning combination is won and medals are paid out, the acquired number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, "01" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" which will be described later, "8 (H)" is stored, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, and the payout number data is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credit) is decremented by "1" in the order of "8" → "7" → ... → "0" according to the number of payouts.
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored in the address "F011 (H)" is, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8"``1'' is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up in the order of "0" → "1" → "2" → . . . → "8".

Further, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during the setting change, display data for displaying "88" is stored as the acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the settings are being changed. Furthermore, by lighting all the segments as "88", it is possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit). Note that the upper limit for the number of medals to be paid out is 15, so when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in this game) is met, the start switch 41 is 2), the specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) on the acquired number display LED 78. In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when specifying the specified number, specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the instruction prescribed number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B(H)".

Further, when winning a push order bell or the like during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Press order instruction information corresponding to winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58, which will be described later, is "=1" to "=6", respectively. Therefore, when displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. Although details will be described later, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information "=1" to "=6" are "A1(H)" to "A6(H)", respectively. For example, when displaying the push order instruction information in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, when a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as acquisition number data.

Address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and accessories are activated. For example, when 1BB is in operation, the D2 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1".
This operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, when the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag described later is read and it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, and the operating state is Set the D0 bit of the flag to "1".
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check process), which will be described later.
Furthermore, the operational state flag of the accessory is also cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

Address "F031 (H)" is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and in this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are respectively assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned to the operating state flag.
During the main processing in FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically during the main process in FIG. 41, in step S279 (start switch acceptance process).

Address “F040(H)” is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a small winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and a medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the number of credits, or actually paying out one medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is subtracted by "1". That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041 (H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and the initially stored value is maintained. This value is maintained until the next game's medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when a small winning combination of 8 pieces is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game, when no winning combination is won, as the payout number data buffer. "0" is overwritten.

Address “F042(H)” is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals automatically bet upon replay winning, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
The automatic bet number data is set in step S325 during the game start setting process in FIG.
Address “F043(H)” is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is processed in the medal management process (detects the inserted medals and performs the bet process and credit addition process) in step S276 during the main process in FIG.

Address "F051(H)" is the storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is shown in FIG. 34(A), and as described above, is updated every time an interrupt process is performed.
Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is shown in FIG. 34(B), and takes a value corresponding to normal mode, setting change mode, or setting confirmation mode.

Address "F061 (H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when it is a normal section,
When transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, the D0 bit becomes "1".
Note that the timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "1".
Note that the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not need to be turned on.
Specifically, first, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, and if the end condition of the advantageous section is met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even once. You may end the advantageous section without turning on the light.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (to notify the correct pressing order) in a gaming state where it is an advantageous section and the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section is displayed. Turn on LED 77.
Further, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.
Further, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous section, a process for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process of initializing the advantageous section display LED flag storage area (the process of clearing the advantageous section display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating; until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the stop switch 42 can be operated,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended), but before the payment switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning combination for the game must have been determined, so the period before the start switch 41 is operated (before the winning combination lottery) is excluded. .
When lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is drawn. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when transitioning to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", a counter is used in which even if "1" is subtracted, the value after the subtraction becomes "0". Therefore, during the normal period, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game moves to an advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)".
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at most, so it is composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

Address "F065(H)" is the storage area of the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section, and is also referred to as "MY counter".
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores "a value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference in the number of sheets becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, that value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number of sheets ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count at least the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets during the advantageous section, and there is no need to count during the non-advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in an advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous section every game. Therefore, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated every game without determining whether the game is in an advantageous section or not, thereby simplifying the process.

Furthermore, even when the difference number of coins becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of coins becomes data of a carry-down, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the difference counter value is negative data as a result of the calculation, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example, (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)"
2nd game: Number of bets “3”, number of payouts “9”, difference counter after calculation “0006 (H)” (no correction)
3rd game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
will be updated as follows.
In addition, even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value that reflects the number of differences of the game concerned will be changed again. Since this is a calculated result, this case also corresponds to "updating" the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value with a digit drop, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). Note that a method for determining whether a downgrade has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example in a game during the normal period, the difference counter value will increase by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on winning a small role, but after that, the number of payouts will increase. If it becomes less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

FIG. 36 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 shows an example in which the number of differences initially progressed in a negative direction as the game progressed, but halfway through, for example, with the start of AT, the number of differences turned to increase. The difference counter counts the time when the difference number reaches its lowest value in the process of playing the game, so the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference number counter as the amount of increase in the difference number. be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

In addition, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, so for example, if the difference counter is exactly "2400 (D)" at the end of the current game, the current game In this case, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not met.
Then, in the next game, assuming that the maximum difference in the number of coins in the gaming machine is obtained, the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15", so the difference in the number of coins in the next game will be "+14", The difference counter value at the end of the next game will be "2414 (D)". When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".

Note that the determination of whether the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53, but also by temporarily storing it in a register for updating, etc. This also includes determining the difference counter value (the same applies hereinafter).
In addition, when determining whether or not the value exceeds "2400 (D)" based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, if it is determined that the value does not exceed "2400 (D)", The difference counter value of the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM 53, and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is controlled to be cleared. It is also possible.

Furthermore, in Example 2, as in Example 1, the difference number progressed in a negative direction as the game progressed, but halfway through, for example, with the start of AT, the difference number turned to increase. . In example 2, even when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. In other words, regardless of the accumulated value of the number of differences as the game progresses up to that point, if the number of differences counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" counting from the time when the number of differences reaches the lowest value, the advantageous section is entered. (The next game will be controlled so that it will be a game in the normal section).

Note that when updating the difference counter during the normal section, there is a possibility that the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, such a situation may occur if the player wins a special prize many times and plays the special game repeatedly. In such a case,
1) A method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts;
2) When the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is temporarily reset to "0" at that point.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during an advantageous section, when the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section, the processing As long as the process is executed regardless of the difference, the difference counter will be cleared even if it exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal period.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process specific to the advantageous section, the difference counter will not be cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.
Note that when starting the advantageous section (first game of the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (the initial value is set to "0". Step S354 in FIG. 45, which will be described later). Therefore, it does not matter what the difference counter is before the start of the advantageous section.
and,
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section,
2) When the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games,
satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section.
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent data (values) related to the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. The difference counter is cleared in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous section, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the number of differences decreases as the game progresses, and the number of differences further decreases from the time when the advantageous section starts ("A" in the diagram) until proceeding to "B" in the diagram. An example is shown below. Note that AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and at the beginning of the advantageous section there is a CZ, precursor, or AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from a low probability state to a high probability state). In the case of a specification where the starting point is (while waiting for a replay win to win), the number of differences may decrease even after starting the advantageous section. Furthermore, even if AT is started, if the situation continues where it is difficult to win the push order bell, the number of differences may decrease.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at point "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, under a situation where the number of differences is decreasing, the difference counter value maintains "0". Therefore, the difference counter value remains at "0" from point "A" to point "B" in the figure.
Also, an example is shown in which the number of differences starts to increase from point "B". As a result, the difference counter value also increases. When it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (when reaching point "C" in the figure), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, and the advantageous section is ended. (Transition to normal section).

In this way, the difference counter starts counting positively from the point when the difference number reaches its lowest value ("B") after the start of the advantageous section, rather than from the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section. Medals will not be awarded to the player beyond the range where the number of balls increases (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37(a)). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's gambling desire from being aroused.

The above points will be explained more specifically using numerical values as examples.
For example, if the specification is such that AT is started by lottery after starting an advantageous section, the number of differences may decrease as the game progresses when it is an advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, suppose that player X wins the advantageous section and starts the advantageous section, but the AT does not start and the game is stopped when the difference becomes "-200 coins."

Next, it is assumed that player Y starts playing a game on the gaming machine, and when the difference becomes "-50 coins", he wins AT and starts AT. Then, after starting the advantageous section, if the advantageous section (AT) continues until the difference exceeds "+2400 medals", player Y will be able to obtain "2400 + 250 = 2650 medals". .
Therefore, as mentioned above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition "from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value until it exceeds +2400 coins", for example, it is possible to prevent other players from getting hooked. We are trying to prevent people from being able to acquire such things, including those that are available to them, and to not encourage the desire for gambling.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 37(b) shows an example in which the difference number decreases in the normal section, turns positive from point "D" on the way, and then starts the advantageous section from point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value becomes positive at time "E" in the figure. However, at the start of the advantageous section ("E" in the figure), the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, ie, updated to "0").
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous section (the increase from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be counted positively from point "E", and when it exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends.

The explanation returns to FIG. 35.
Address “F067(H)” is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT, and set to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 in FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final AT game, and is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) to be described later. Furthermore, the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

Address "F068(H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when the AT game number counter reaches "0", subsequent counting (subtraction) is stopped.
The AT game count counter is updated (subtracted) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41, which will be described later).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be configured from a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when transitioning to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when AT is won. Furthermore, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT games may be added when a predetermined condition is met during AT, and the number of AT games may be increased when the player wins an additional lottery. In this case, the increased amount is added to the AT game counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is illustrated, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided in place of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, an initial value of the difference number of sheets that can be acquired is set. In addition, if you win an additional prize, the difference in the number of additional tickets will be added. Then, each time there is a payout, the difference number of coins for the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.

Next, each process during the game will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the program starts from the program start process shown in FIG. 38.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes the registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, setting the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting the type of interrupt (for example, setting it as a maskable interrupt, etc.), and setting the parity bit to be added to the control command to be sent. setting (for example, setting to even parity). In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

Next, the process advances to step S203, and the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In this embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off processing completed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). This power-off processing completed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was performed normally when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, calculation of the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed. Specifically, the checksum calculation is executed for the same range as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed at the time of power-off processing (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, and the stack area).
In step S205, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 53 for which the checksum has been calculated at the current time, and it is determined whether the next address is the address for which the checksum is to be calculated. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S204 and continues the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process advances to step S206.

Further, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in multiple ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is to be initialized, similar processing is performed in the specified range of the RWM 53 in this embodiment.
Note that when it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completion flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (eg, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (all ranges) of the RWM 53 has been completed normally, the normal value is stored as power-off recovery data. On the other hand, if the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value (“No” in step S203), or if it is determined that there is an abnormality when calculating the checksum (full range) of the RWM 53 in step S204, the power-off process is terminated. Store abnormal values as recovery data.

In the next step S207, level data of a predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (eg, A register). Next, the process advances to step S208, and based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51, it is determined whether the designated switch is on. In this embodiment, the "designated switch" refers to a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (casing) is opened) among the predetermined input ports 51, and a set door switch. (The door provided on the setting key switch. Note that the setting door is not required.) Signals of the setting key switch (a switch that turns on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a specified direction) There are three.

Then, the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is opened), the setting door switch signal is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch signal is on. Allow settings to be changed only in certain cases. When all three specified switches are on, it is possible to proceed to the setting change process in step S212, but when at least one specified switch is not on, the process is not allowed to proceed to the setting change process in step S212. .
In other words, even when the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch signal is Since it is impossible for this to be turned on and there is a high possibility of fraud, the transition to the settings change process is not allowed.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all designated switches are on, the process advances to step S209, and when it is determined that they are not on, the process advances to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined that it is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether the setting change prohibition flag is on. Here, the setting change prohibition flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279) to the game end check process (step S301) in FIG. 41, which will be described later. This is the flag to be used. Then, when the setting change prohibition flag is on, the process advances to step S211, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of step S212.
Note that in this embodiment, a setting change prohibition flag is provided, but if the configuration is such that the setting change is possible at all times, the setting change prohibition flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S213 and the power-off recovery process (M_POWE
R_ON). On the other hand, if it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process advances to step S214 to perform unrecoverable error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG. 38.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as the initialization range within the used area of the RWM 53. Here, "within the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data related to the progress of the game. The range shown in FIG. 35 is entirely within the usage area. On the other hand, "outside the used area", which will be described later, refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data that is not related to the progress of the game. Specifically, a storage area that stores data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can be mentioned.

In addition, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and includes setting value data (address "F000 (H)"), gaming state (for example, RT state), winning The initialization range in which the flags, etc. of special winning combinations having , etc. are not initialized is defined as a "predetermined range".
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, if BB2 is in operation before the power is turned off (when the winning flag of BB2 is on), if the power is turned off normally, the setting change process will not be executed. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data regarding advantageous sections or AT. Therefore, in FIG. 35, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" are the targets of initialization here.

Next, the process advances to step S222, and the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S224, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S222 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range within the usage area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and is the entire range within the usage area including the setting value data (address "F000(H)").

Then, the process proceeds to step S224, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the used area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S225, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S224 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process advances to step S226.

In step S226, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Note that the reason for saving the AF register is to save the F (flag) register here, but the AF register is saved due to the convenience of the instruction. The process then proceeds to step S227, where a predetermined range outside the used area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM 53. Further, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether the power-off recovery data (value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S230, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S228 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range outside the used area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power outage is not normal, and is the entire range including the ring buffer etc. that stores the number of games and the number of payouts for displaying the ratio.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the area used by the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process advances to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, interrupt processing startup settings are performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S202 are set. Since this embodiment uses timer interrupt processing as the interrupt processing, processing for setting the timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, "2.235 ms"), etc. is included. Then, after the processing in step S233, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the configuration is such that no interrupt processing is executed before "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request is set at the time of starting the setting change. This process is a process in which a control command to be sent to the sub-control board 80 is set (stored) in a register in order to notify the sub-control board 80 side that a setting change process is to be started.

Note that "output request set" means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Moreover, the control command here does not only mean the command actually transmitted, but also the command that is the source of the command actually transmitted.
Next, the process advances to step S235, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, the process advances to step S236, and the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, the process waits until the number of interrupts reaches "224" ("1" is subtracted for each number of interrupts, and until the set number of interrupts reaches "0"). This waiting process is also called delay processing or standby processing because it does not allow the main processing to proceed further. Note that during this waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting process), the main process is not allowed to proceed, but the interrupt process is executed.

In this way, the reason why the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 is that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the sub-control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 side executes a 2-byte time waiting process. In particular, this is because the main control board 50 side cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub-control board 80 side is still undergoing initialization processing, the main control board 50 side has already completed the initialization, and the processing progresses further, and the control processing of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board It is possible to prevent the progress of the control process 80 from becoming out of synchronization.
Furthermore, after executing the output request set and control command set 1 at the start of setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts initializing the RWM 83, but the wait time is set to be sufficient for the initialization of the RWM 83 to be completed. do. Thereby, after the initialization processing of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub control board 80 side, the main control board 50 side proceeds to the processing after step S238.

Note that the control command for starting the setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is sent to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to steps S237 and subsequent steps (the main process does not proceed).

After the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236 ends, the process advances to step S237, and the setting change display data is stored as acquisition number data. Next, the process advances to step S238, and the value "00011100 (B)" corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag.

Through the processing of steps S237 and S238, when interrupt processing is executed after these processing, the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (obtained number display LED 78 and set value display LED 73) can be lit.
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S238, it is possible to display "8" in each of digits 3a and 4a ("88" is displayed in the acquired number display LED 78), and digit b5 (set value display) can be displayed. The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Note that the acquisition number data and the LED display request flag are initialized by the initialization process in the used area of the RWM 53 in step S224, so the values before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process advances to step S239, and interrupt wait processing is executed. This process is a process that waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. Then, after one interrupt time has elapsed, the process advances to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not an operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, by determining the rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch, it is determined whether the setting change switch is turned on. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the setting value data (address "F000(H)") of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When interrupt processing is executed after the setting value data is updated, the updated value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during a setting change, the set value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (interrupt wait) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process in step S239 is not provided, if it is determined in step S240 that the start-up data of the setting change switch is on, the setting value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S242. If it is determined that it is not, the process advances to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the start-up data of the setting change switch is on.

If interrupt processing is executed even once after it is determined that the setting change switch is on in step S240, the rising data of the setting change switch will be turned off. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it continues to be determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by "2" or more even if the setting change switch is operated only once. Therefore, in step S239, interrupt wait processing is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether a setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, where the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88" indicating that settings are being changed. Next, the process advances to step S245, and a value "00011111 (B)" corresponding to normal mode is stored in the LED display request flag.

Due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S244, the display of digits 3a and 4a (obtained number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00".
Further, due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S245, "0" is displayed in each of the digits 1a and 2a ("00" is displayed on the credit number display LED 76). Further, since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. On the other hand, the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) does not light up because the setting is not being changed or confirmed.

Next, the process advances to step S246, and similarly to step S234, an output request is set at the end of the setting change. This process ends the setting change process and transfers the data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, the setting value data stored at address "F000(H)") to the sub-control board 80. This process sets a control command to be notified. Next, the process advances to step S247, and the main control board 50 executes control command set 1 similarly to step S235. Then, the process advances to step S248 and shifts to main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (for example, register values, main processing instruction processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (within the range of set value 1 to set value 6), in other words, whether the range of the set value data is within the range of "F000 (H)" It is determined whether the set value data is within the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253, and when it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs and the process proceeds to step S264, where the process proceeds to irreversible error processing. .

Proceeding to step S253, an unused area within the used area of the RWM 53 is set in a register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, the RWM 53 within the range set in step S253 is initialized. Here, it is possible that a value may be stored in the RWM 53 even in an unused area due to noise or the like. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraud or other fraudulent activity, so be sure to initialize the unused area when the power is turned on (usually once a day). There is.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area within the used area) has been completed, and when it is determined that it has been completed, the process advances to step S256.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to the process in step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, the RWM 53 within the range set in step S257 is initialized.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed, and when it is determined that it has been completed, the process advances to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is similar to the process in step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, a predetermined input port 51 is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process advances to step S262 and an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and is the same process as step S233 described above.
Next, the process advances to step S263, where the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if it is determined "No" in step S203 (when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality during checksum calculation in step S204, step In S206, the abnormal value is stored as recovery data after the power is turned off. In this case, since the determination in step S209 is "Yes", the process advances to setting change processing (FIG. 39) in step S212.
In the setting change process of FIG. 39, since "No" is determined in step S222 and step S228, the entire range inside and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, after "F000(H)" All data will be initialized.

2) In the program start process, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation has been performed normally, when proceeding to the setting change process, step S222 and step S222 in FIG. Since it is determined "Yes" in S228, the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the specified range (inside the used area and outside the used area) of the RWM 53 is initialized.

3) In the program start process, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation is also performed normally, if the setting change process is not performed, the power-off process (step S213) is performed. 40). In this case, if the set value is normal in step S252 in FIG. 40, the initialization of the RWM 53 (inside the used area and outside the used area) at the time of normal power-on is executed. As described above, this initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in this embodiment. The main process is a process for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As mentioned above, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (for example, register values, main processing instruction processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs. Setting the stack pointer is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, game start setting processing (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is a process of generating, updating, and saving an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals that have been bet at the current time, and reads the bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence or absence of bet medals is determined based on the bet number read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on, and when it is on, processing such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S276, management processing of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the medals have been taken care of, and determining whether or not the payment switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, soft random number updating processing is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" at a time) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the winning combination lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of "0" to "65535(D)". Note that as an updating method, processing may be performed in which an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) is added to the value before updating.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, "No" is determined in step S278.

In step S279, processing upon reception of the start switch is executed. This process is a process that sets a flag that settings cannot be changed, sets an output request when the reel 31 starts rotating, and sets the number of outputs for outputting a medal input signal as an external signal to a hall computer, etc. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the designated prescribed number display data and payout number data have been previously stored as the acquired number data, they are cleared.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, a specified number may be instructed (displayed) on the obtained number display LED 78 before the start of the game. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the designated prescribed number display data may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared and a process is executed to display "00" on the acquired number display LED 78 (or turn it off).
Further, at the time of step S280, when the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the winning number data, the payout number data is cleared in step S280.

Next, the process advances to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later, and is a process for subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is determined based on the winning combination lottery result by the winning lottery processing in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of additional AT games may be determined. Therefore, when adding the number of AT games and adding the additional amount to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
In addition, after receiving the start switch (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but this is not limited to this. After the winning combination lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 are stopped (after step S290). The AT game number counter may also be updated.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is activated after all reels 31 have stopped and after the medal payout process due to winnings has been completed (after step S300). Update.

In step S282, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes a winning combination lottery (corresponding to the above-mentioned "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of winning lottery is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether or not the acquired random number corresponds to any winning combination using the winning combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section transition lottery process. This process is the process shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later. In this embodiment, an AT lottery is also executed during the advantageous section transfer lottery. As shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later, when the game is in an advantageous period but not in AT mode (for example, when the main game state is CZ), an AT lottery process is executed in step S348 in FIG.
Next, the process advances to step S284, and a push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) is performed. This process is shown in FIG. 48, and when the instruction function is activated in the game during AT (the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), a push order instruction number is generated, This is a process of displaying push order instruction information, etc.

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes processing to determine whether or not the minimum gaming time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum playing time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≒ 4099 ms)". It is. In step S279, if it is determined that the minimum playing time is "0", an initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum playing time (timer value). Then, the minimum gaming time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing. When the process advances to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start rotating the reel 31. When the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, acceptance of stopping the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S290.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the light may be provided as segment data and that data may be output.

In step S291, symbol display is determined. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304; if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 usually does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, if a symbol that should not originally be displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined that there is an abnormality ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Executes unrecoverable error handling.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S293, a payout number update process is executed. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the above-mentioned payout number data and payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is the process shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S295, and interrupt wait processing is performed. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. Through the processing in steps S295 and S296, interrupts are prohibited immediately after the interrupts occur.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S256 in FIG. 40. Next, the process advances to step S298, and ratio setting processing is executed. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc. in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step S300, interrupts are permitted (restarted). In this manner, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited before the process is executed.

Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during ratio set processing because ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area, and when a program outside the used area is being executed in the main process. This is because if interrupt processing is inserted into the program, programs in the used area and programs outside the used area will coexist, making the processing complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S301, and a game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and performs processing such as clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request set at the end of the game is performed, and a control command set 1 is performed in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is finished, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). The game standby display time of this embodiment is “268
46" interrupt (≈60000ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), so "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, from this point on, the value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the acquisition number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. 41. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game was "8" and the player made a payment by operating the payment switch 43 and ended the game, "00" will be displayed after about 1 minute. be done. This has the effect that the number of empty tables can be reduced by allowing the hall clerk or another player to recognize them as empty tables.
Note that instead of displaying "00" on the acquisition number display LED 78, the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digits and lower digits) may be turned off, or the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off and the lower digit ``0'' may be displayed. In any case, it is only necessary to display a machine so that a hall clerk or another player can recognize it as an empty machine.

Next, the process advances to step S312, and initialization processing of the push order instruction number is executed. This process is a process for clearing the push order instruction number stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the symbol combination display flag data is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB activation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the number of coins that can be obtained during 1BB operation (1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of coins obtainable in a 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operating state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
In the next step S317, the operating state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operating state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (at this point, for example, stored in the A register) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, the previous operating state flag information is replaced with the operating state flag information updated in step S317.
For example, when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (1BB winning), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".

In the next step S319, it is determined whether RB operation has started. In addition, in this embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off ("0") at the end of the 2nd game (or when winning twice), but when the end conditions of the 1BB game are not satisfied ( (when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag is "1") is set to "1" in this game start setting process. If it is determined in step S319 that it is time to start RB operation, the process proceeds to step S320, and if it is determined that it is not time to start RB operation, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of prizes won during the RB operation are saved. This process saves (memorizes) "2 (H)" in the game count counter (not shown in FIG. 35) when the RB is activated, which is provided in the RWM 53, and when the RB is activated, which is provided in the RWM 53. This is a process of saving (memorizing) "2 (H)" in the winning number counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process advances to step S321.

In addition, the number of games played when RB is activated and the number of prizes won when RB is activated are both set to "2 (H)" as the initial value, and each time the number of games played or the number of prizes won increases by "1". This is a counter that is decremented by 1. However, the initial value of these counter values is not limited to this, and the initial value of these counter values is set to "0", and each time the number of games played or the number of prizes won increases by "1", it is incremented by "1", and these counter values are set to "2 ( H)" may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether a condition for specifying a specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where a specified number is specified. However, in the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, a specified number may be specified at the start of the game, so this process is included in this flowchart. If it is determined that the condition for specifying the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and if it is determined that the condition for specifying the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, specified specified number display data is stored as acquired number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number "2" is specified, and when the specified number "2" is specified, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The instruction prescribed number display data for displaying "0A" is defined as "0B(H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, "0B(H)" is set as the acquired number data. Remember.
Furthermore, when displaying the specified number "2", "0A" is displayed instead of "02" in order to avoid confusion with the payout number, error number, and push order instruction information.
The number of payouts is displayed as one of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digit. Also, for error numbers, "A" is not displayed in the lower digits.

Here, the error numbers (numbers displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in this embodiment are as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (No medal in hopper 35)
H0: Abnormality in the payout sensor 37 CE: Medal retention error CP: Illegal passage error of medals CH: Abnormality in the passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality in the input sensor 44 C1: Abnormal medal insertion error FE: Sub-tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Front door opened E1: Power failure recovery error E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value error E7: Random number error

Note that the types of errors are not limited to the above. Furthermore, an error whose upper digit is "E" means an irrecoverable error.
As described above, since "A" is never displayed in the lower digit of the error number, there is no confusion between the error number and the designated specified number.
Further, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "=1" to "=6". Therefore, the push order instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions will not be confused.

In addition, in step S322, before storing the designated specified number display data as the number of acquisitions data, the number of payouts in the previous game may be stored as the number of acquisitions data (
(If a small role won in the previous game). Note that the payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process (described later in FIG. 49) due to winnings. Therefore, when storing the designated prescribed number display data, the previous payout number data may be overwritten. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and processing for clearing the acquisition number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313. When it is determined that the replay symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the symbol combination in the replay is not displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads the bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals (bet number data) bet on in the previous game. Next, the process advances to step S325, and automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process advances to step S326, and an output request for the operating state is set. In the next step S327, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that replay has been activated, that 1BB has been activated, etc. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Note that "previously" (means before the filing of the present application and does not mean "publicly known"; the same applies hereinafter) refers to the time when the bet number is added, specifically, during the main process in FIG. 41, in step S276. In the medal management process, the acquisition number data was cleared. As a result, even if a small winning combination was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of winning the small winning combination was stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared during the bet number adding process.
However, in this embodiment, before the medal management process is executed, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
When a specified number is specified, it is necessary to prevent the specified specified number display data from being cleared during bet processing. In this embodiment, when the specified number is specified, the specified number is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquisition number data is not cleared in the medal management process, but when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquisition number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG.

However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the specified number is specified, the specified specified number display data is cleared after operating the start switch 41, but when the specified number is not specified, the same as before, when the number of bets is added, The acquisition number data may be cleared (in the medal management process). In this case, for example, in the process of adding the number of bets, before executing the process of clearing the acquired number data, it is determined whether or not the specified number has been specified in the current game, and when it is determined that the specified number has been specified. When it is determined that the prescribed number has not been specified, the acquired number data may be cleared.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether the AT flag is on ("1"). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. That is, unless AT is in progress, the AT game count counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether the number of bets is "3". In this process, the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 is read and it is determined whether the bet number for the game is "3". When the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. In this embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated (processing related to the instruction function is executed) only when a game is played with the number of bets (regular number) "3" during AT. In other words, even during AT, when a game is started with the number of bets (regular number) "2", the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and difference counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

Proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, even when an AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not subtracted (updated) if the bet number is not "3" even during AT.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transfer lottery process in step S283 in FIG.
In addition, in this embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous section transition lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone transition lottery process and the AT lottery process may be executed independently. You can. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be only the advantageous section transfer lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether the number of bets (specified number) for the current game is "3". When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Therefore, when the number of bets (specified number) is "3", it is possible to execute the advantageous section transfer lottery in step S345 and the advantageous section transfer process (process related to the advantageous section) in step S347, which will be described later, and step S348 The AT lottery process (processing related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the number of bets (regular number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether the advantageous section type flag is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "0" (it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (it is an advantageous section), step S348 Proceed to. When the advantageous section type flag is "1" (already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery result in the current game is a target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning winning combination is the lottery target in the advantageous section. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted here, for example, if you win a special role alone, if you win both a special role and a small role, or if you win a small role (rare small role), it is a target lottery result. to decide. In addition, the target lottery results do not include non-winners. This is because in a game in which the winning combination is not won (a game in which the conditional device is not activated), processing related to the advantageous section is not executed.
If it is determined in step S343 that the lottery result is a target lottery result, the process advances to step S344, and if it is determined that it is not a target lottery result, the process according to this flowchart is terminated (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed, or the advantageous zone is not selected). (Winner)

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Here, a detailed explanation will be omitted, but for example, among the winning hands to be drawn, the middle cherry (winner alone or winning in combination with a special prize) may be set as a guaranteed winning hand (a winning hand) in the advantageous section transition lottery. If you win a middle-tier cherry, it may be determined that it is a specific lottery result.
If it is determined in step S344 that the result is a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and if it is determined that it is not a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, if the result is not a specific lottery result, an advantageous section transfer lottery is performed, and if the result is a specific lottery result, an advantageous section transfer process (step S347) is executed without performing an advantageous section transfer lottery (always transfer to an advantageous section). do). Note that it is also possible to execute the advantageous section transfer lottery even if the result is a specific lottery result, and to set it so that there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery.

In step S345, an advantageous section transfer lottery is performed. As an advantageous section transition lottery, for example, a lottery may be conducted in the same way as a winning lottery, using a lottery table in which numbers are predetermined according to winning lottery results. For example, when the winning number is "A", there is a 35% probability of winning in the advantageous section, and when the winning number is "B", there is a 60% probability of winning in the advantageous section, etc. can be mentioned.
In addition, if the winning combination lottery result is not eligible for the lottery for the advantageous section, the answer in step S343 is "No", so if the result is "Yes" in step S343, that is, the winning lottery result is the lottery result for the advantageous section transfer lottery. In this case, in the advantageous section shift lottery, a lottery is conducted using a lottery table having a number of at least "1" or more. However, the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is set to be 1/17500 or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery at step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S347, advantageous section transition processing is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 45, and is the process of setting flags and counters based on winning in the advantageous section.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Note that, without being limited to the example of this embodiment, AT may always be started (without performing an AT lottery) when moving to an advantageous section. Alternatively, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the AT may always be non-AT, and after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, after playing a predetermined number of games), it may be determined whether or not to perform AT.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition process in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on ("1") the advantageous section type flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S352, and the main control board 50 sets an initial value of the number of games played in the advantageous section to "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter.

In the next step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". If the difference counter continues to be updated during the normal period (non-advantageous period) and is always set to "0" at the end of the game when the period is not advantageous, the process of step S353 is not necessary. However, the initial value may be set to "0" to prevent noise.
Note that at the end of the advantageous section, initialization processing including the difference counter is executed, so that the difference counter is "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of a specification in which the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous section, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous section is "0", so it is possible to omit the process of step S353. .
On the other hand, in the case where the difference counter continues to be updated during the non-advantageous section as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before shifting to the advantageous section. Therefore, in step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is executed based on the winning combination lottery result. As in step S345, this lottery may include performing an AT lottery using a lottery table in which the winning numbers are determined for each combination lottery result.
Note that the AT lottery does not necessarily need to be performed, and for example, a winning lottery result that is not determined to be AT and a winning lottery result that is always determined to be AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not AT was won in the AT lottery in step S361. When it is determined that AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and when it is determined that AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes an AT initial game count determination process. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S364, and the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Here, the main game states of this embodiment include normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. Note that it is also possible to provide a precursor as the main game state after winning AT and before starting AT, but in this embodiment, to simplify the explanation, when AT is won, AT is started immediately. shall be. Further, information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that AT has not been won and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to CZ. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial number of games determination process in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, in step S371, it is determined whether the winning combination in the current game is a confirmed winning combination. As described above, a rare combination such as middle cherry is set as the confirmed combination. When it is determined that the confirmed role has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the confirmed role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to each of the flowcharts ends.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, the initial number of AT games is distributed depending on whether or not the confirmed winning combination has been won. A lottery may also be performed. In other words, even if it is a winning lottery result, any number of times of playing may be selected from among a plurality of number of times of playing.
Also, during AT, the AT game count determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an additional lottery for the AT game count. When winning the lottery for adding up the number of AT games, the determined number of additions is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether an instruction condition (a condition for operating an instruction function) is satisfied. When the game is AT and a combination with an advantageous push order such as push order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
Note that if you win the advantageous section in the current game ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and win AT ("Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), you will win the advantageous section from the next game. This time, the game is not in an advantageous period. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be activated in the current game, the result is "No" in step S381.
When it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether the number of bets in the current game is "3". In this process, it is determined whether the bet number is "3" by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53.
When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in this embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (executing the process related to the instruction function) is set to be the number of bets "3" (a specified number of one). For this reason, for example, even if a game is started with the bet number "2" during AT and a winning combination with an advantageous push order (for example, push order bell) is won, the instruction function will not operate (the correct push order will be (not notified).

In the next step S383, a winning number (conditional device number) is set. The winning number (conditional device number) determined in the winning combination lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S384, and a press order instruction number table (not shown) is set. Here, the start address of the push order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process advances to the next step S385.

In step S385, designated address data is set. This process is a process in which the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as an offset value, and the offset value is added to the top address of the push order instruction number table to obtain data corresponding to the obtained address. As a result, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (an area for storing the press order instruction number; not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (press order instruction number) is stored as acquisition number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, it is assumed that the winning combinations to be drawn are the same as those in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), which will be described later. Then, when winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during AT, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the winning number data is as follows.
Winning number “3”: Press order instruction number “A1 (H)”
Winning number “4”: Push order instruction number “A2 (H)”
Winning number “5”: Press order instruction number “A3 (H)”
Winning number “6”: Press order instruction number “A4 (H)”
Winning number “7”: Press order instruction number “A5 (H)”
Winning number “8”: Press order instruction number “A6 (H)”

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data by the push order instruction number setting process shown in FIG. As a result, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG.
)” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388, where it is determined whether the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not on, the process advances to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether the game state of the current game (RT or main game state) is a game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Note that whether or not the gaming state is such that the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is set in advance, and here it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the preset gaming state. Specifically, the data of the current RT and main game state is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and by reading this data, the game state of the current game is determined to be a game state in which the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Determine whether or not. When it is determined that the gaming state is such that the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the gaming state is not such that the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process according to this flowchart is ended. do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not yet lit and the section Sim ball output rate is in a gaming state exceeding "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Since the conditions for lighting are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when winning in an advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after moving to an advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even if the section Sim ball output rate is not in a gaming state exceeding "1", at any timing (when an arbitrarily set lighting condition is met) ), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) for winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of payout number data in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S392, and it is determined whether or not medals are paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether the payout number data (A register value) is "0" or not. When it is determined that the number is "0", that is, when it is determined that no medals are paid out, the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", that is, when it is determined that medals are to be paid out, the process advances to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the number of credits data is acquired.
Next, the process advances to step S394, and it is determined whether the number of credits has reached a limit value. Specifically, when the number of credits data acquired in step S393 is "50 (D)", it is determined that the number of credits has reached the limit value, the process proceeds to step S398, and the number of credits data acquired is "50 (D)". (D)'', it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process advances to step S395.

In step S395, a waiting time for credit addition is set. In this embodiment, in order to set the waiting time to about 100 ms, the number of interrupt processing times is set to "46" (46×2.235 ms=about 100 ms). Specifically, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, the process advances to step S396, and a 2-byte time wait process is executed. This process is a process in which the BC register value is subtracted for each interrupt process and waits until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 ends, the process advances to step S397, and "1" is added to the value of the number of credits data. As a result, the display on the credit number display LED 76 becomes "+1" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S397. For example, the display on the credit number display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process in step S397, the process advances to step S399.

When the process advances from step S394 to step S398, one medal payout process (processing for paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. In this process, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and when the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, it is determined that one medal has been correctly paid out. to decide.
Through the above process, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits reaches the limit, the process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquisition number data. As a result, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "+1". For example, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".
In the next step S400, "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

Next, the process advances to step S401, and it is determined whether or not the medal payout has been completed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the updated payout number data has become "0". When it is determined that the payout number data is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the payout number data is not "0", the process returns to step S393 and continues the process.

In the above payout process, when performing the payout process to add "1" to the number of credits, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. Thereby, the display on the credit number display LED 76 can be shown to the player as if it is counting up. For example, the display on the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is "08", and when 8 medals are added to this, "display "08" → 100ms standby process → display "09" → 100ms Standby processing→...→100ms standby processing→Display “16””. On the other hand, if a waiting time is not provided when adding "1" to the number of credits, the display will appear to change from "08" to "16" instantly.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of credits, by executing a 2-byte time waiting process every time "1" is added, the payout sound ("Pururu...") is output from the sub-control board 80 side. ”) and the counting up of the number of credits can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because in order to actually pay out one medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out one medal, so it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually dispensing medals, the dispensing sound can be synchronized with the dispensing sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, processing is performed to clear the flag of the condition device (also referred to as winning information, stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). This process is a process for clearing conditions other than the special winning combination, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination has stopped on the active line, the processing for clearing the special winning winning condition equipment is also executed. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is turned off. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to "0". Next, the process advances to step S413, and the replay activation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operating state flag to "0".

In the next step S414, it is determined whether the AT game number counter has reached "0". Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main processing of FIG. 41, as described above. As described above, in this embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated after the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41), but this is not limited to this. check processing) or during the processing of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Furthermore, although this embodiment shows an example of a game number management type AT that updates the AT game number counter, in the case of a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is set to "0" in step S414. Decide whether it has happened or not. Note that the AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 41) due to winning.
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process advances to step S415, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process advances to step S416, and advantageous section counter management is executed. This process is a process for updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, and is the process shown in FIG. 51 or 52, which will be described later. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. FIG. 51 shows Example 1, and FIG. 52 shows Example 2.
In advantageous section counter management, the following processing is executed.
1) Updating the advantageous section clear counter 2) Updating the difference counter 3) Determining whether the end conditions of the advantageous section are met 4) When the end conditions of the advantageous section are met, initialize (clear) the data related to the advantageous section. )
Further, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the number of bets (regulated number).
Note that the present embodiment is configured such that advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section, and the advantageous section counter management is executed only when the vehicle is in an advantageous section.

In Example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. For example, the subtraction here is as follows.
"0010(H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F(H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
“0000 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)” (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", no downflow occurs and "0000(H)" remains. In this way, no matter what value the value before subtraction is, since it is just one instruction (one step) to subtract "1", it is necessary to judge whether the count value before update is "0" or not. is not necessary, and there is no need to add the value of the carry flag after subtraction. Therefore, the time required to update the count value can be significantly reduced. In addition, by configuring in this way, it is possible to judge whether or not it is in an advantageous section from the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and to determine whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, if the game in the advantageous section is 1500 There is no need to judge whether a game has been executed or not, whether an arbitrary ending condition has been satisfied, etc.).

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether the advantageous section clear counter value before the subtraction was "0". This process is determined based on whether the carry flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the process advances to step S436, and when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before subtraction is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S436. The process advances to step S424. Note that when the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), this means that the current game is not a game in an advantageous section (the current game is a game in a non-advantageous section (normal section)). ) means that

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is "0". This process is determined based on whether the zero flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S422. That is, it is determined whether the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag becomes "1", the process advances to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process advances to step S425. In addition, when the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the current game ends the game in the advantageous section (the next game is a game in the non-advantageous section (normal section)) ) means.

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S426, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay activation symbol was displayed in the current game (whether or not the replay won a prize). In this process, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that the replay activation symbol has been displayed. When it is determined that the re-game activation symbol is displayed, the process advances to step S434, and when it is determined that the re-game activation symbol is not displayed, the process advances to step S427.

In step S427, a payout number data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the payout number data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference counter) and storing the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S429, and the value of bet number data is acquired. This process is a process of reading bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value becomes less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether the carry flag becomes "1" by the subtraction in step S430, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than "0", and the process proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process advances to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing the HL register value (setting it to "0") is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Therefore, when the process moves to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes "0".
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value. The upper limit value of the difference counter is set to "2400 (D)". In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and "2401(D)". In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag becomes "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag becomes "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process advances to step S435. Note that when the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area regarding the advantageous section (clears the data regarding the advantageous section). Data related to advantageous sections include an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game count counter, and the like. Furthermore, information on the main game state can be mentioned. Note that the information regarding advantageous sections does not include RT status numbers, LED display counters, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000(H)" to "F052(H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Now assume that the LED display counter is to be cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" when the advantageous section ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized to "00000010 (B)", the LED display counter should be updated to "00000001 (B)" in the next interrupt process, and the LED Even though it is possible to light up the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76), the LED display counter ends up being "00010000 (B)". Therefore, the display of the LED whose LED display counter corresponds to "00000001(B)" is delayed, and there is a possibility that the LED appears to be turned off for a moment.

Furthermore, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor) (total number of games counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value of minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Input port 51 information 6) Control command buffer data 7) Stack area data 8) External signal information The above is an example of typical data, and the data that will not be cleared is limited to the above data. It doesn't mean that it will happen.

Next, the process advances to step S436, and the main control board 50 determines whether the advantageous section type flag is "0" (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", particularly in this embodiment, when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section), the process advances to step S437. Note that the reason why the advantageous section type flag is set to "1" at this point is because the player won the transfer lottery for an advantageous section in this game, and the advantageous section type flag was set to "1" in step S351 in FIG. In this case, the determination in step S423 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous section type flag is cleared in step S435, so the determination in step S436 will not be "No".

In step S437, an initial value is set in an advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting the advantageous section clear counter to "1500 (D)". Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F063(H)" is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference counter, the number of payouts is first added (step S428), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S430). The reason for processing in this way is as follows.
For example, assume that when the difference counter is "2 (D)", the number of bets is "3 (D)" and the number of payouts is "9 (D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1 (D)" (actually, "FFFF (H)"), and the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when the payout number is added, "9 (D)" is added to "-1 (D)", so it becomes "8 (D)" and the carry flag is "1" (the carry is ).

The difference in the number of coins for this game is "+6", so just by adding the difference number of coins "+6" to the difference counter "2 (D)" before updating, the carry flag becomes "1" and the irregular A situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not. If the carry flag is "1" or not, it would be determined "Yes" in step S431 even though no carry down has occurred, and the difference counter would be initialized in step S432. This will set the value. Note that the carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" in any case where a carry or a carry down occurs as a result of subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", if you first add the payout number "9 (D)", the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that point, and then the bet is made. When the number is subtracted, it becomes "8 (D)". In this case, the carry flag is "0" because no downflow occurs.
For the above reasons, when updating the difference counter, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the determination process in step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

In addition, in the advantageous section counter management of this embodiment, the subtraction process (step S422) of the advantageous section counter is first executed, and when the value before subtraction is "0" (when "Yes" at step S423, that is, (when it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the difference counter updating process (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section, but when the section is a non-advantageous section, the difference counter update process is performed. Processing efficiency is improved by not executing . Therefore, the processing order is such that the advantageous section clear counter is first subtracted, and then the difference counter is updated. Of course, if the specification is such that it is determined whether or not it is in an advantageous section, and if it is in an advantageous section, the process of subtracting the advantageous section clear counter and updating the difference counter is performed, then the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. It is also possible to execute the update process of the difference counter before the process.

Furthermore, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (at the time of replay winning), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing this, even if a situation occurs where an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference sheet counter due to noise etc. at the end of the game, "Yes" will be returned in step S434. , the advantageous section can be ended. On the other hand, if such confirmation is not necessary, the process of this flowchart may be terminated when "Yes" is obtained in step S426.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 51, it is determined in step S426 whether or not the replay activation symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the replay activation symbol is stopped and displayed, the difference counter updating process (steps S427 to S430) is skipped to speed up the processing.
In particular, in a game where the replay activation symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the number of payouts for the game may be regarded as "0" (deemed number of payouts), and the number of bets for the next game may be regarded as "0", and the difference counter may be updated. . However, for example, if an SB (single bonus) is set as a winning combination during an advantageous period, and the SB is won, the next game is to play one SB game with a bet number of "1", but this SB game If you win a replay, the replay activation symbol may stop displaying. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the number of bets is "3" (other than the SB game, a game with a bet number of "1" is not possible). However, in this case, the number of deemed payouts in the SB game and the number of bets in the next game do not match, so the problem is how to count the difference counter.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference counter in a game in which the replay activation symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a second example of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to processes similar to those in FIG. 51.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the number of payouts is first added to the difference counter, and then the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the number of payouts is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the number of payouts is added after subtracting the number of bets from the difference counter, the carry flag may end up being "1" even if there is no downturn in the end, and the calculation result is It has been explained that it is no longer possible to determine whether the carry flag is "0" or not based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter (step S430), and then the number of payouts is added (step S428), and in step S441, without referring to the value of the carry flag, It is determined whether the calculation result is less than "0".
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, the step S441 is determined depending on whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores the upper digits) value of the HL register value is "1". It is determined whether the calculation result of is less than "0".

for example,
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
Assume that
In this case, the difference counter value after the calculation is
0000(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.
Note that "/" indicates a break every 4 bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before the calculation is "0000 (H)", but if the HL register value before the calculation is not "0000 (H)" and "The difference in the number of sheets in this game > HL register For example, if
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, if the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "difference number of coins in current game <HL register value", for example, firstly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.

Also, secondly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, thirdly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after calculation)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)". Here, if "2400 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000(B)"
becomes.
The upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", so when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
Furthermore, at the end of this game, the difference counter value reached "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section were not met, and the next game Suppose you have migrated. Then, in the next game, the difference in the number of coins will increase the most when the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15 (D)", so the difference in the number of coins in the game will be "14 (D)". becomes.
Therefore, the difference counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, if "2414 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110(B)"
becomes.

Furthermore, when the difference counter value reaches "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so the difference counter is cleared in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
From the above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
The D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)", the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0".

From the above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1" except in the case of a downgrade.
In addition, in order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference counter value must become "32768 (D)", and the difference number must reach such a value, excluding a downgrade. The advantageous section will not continue until the end.

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
If so, the HL register value after the calculation becomes "FFFD(H)".
Here, “FFFD(H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
It is.

therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
In this case, when the difference counter is updated, the HL register value becomes "FFFF (H)".

Here, “FFFF(H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
It is.
therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
In this way, when a downgrade occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference counter, when there is no digit down, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0", and when there is a digit down, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0". 1".
Therefore, in step S441 of FIG. 52, when determining whether the calculation result is less than "0", it is determined whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". When the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the calculation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether the calculation result is "0" without determining whether the carry flag is "1" as a result of the calculation.
Since it is determined whether the calculation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the number of payouts is added to the difference counter value after subtracting the number of bets.

Also, as is clear from the above, even if the difference counter reaches the maximum value "2414 (D)", it is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when a digit decrease occurs in the difference counter value, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value but also the D6 bit, D5 bit, and D4 bit become "1".

Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1". , it may be determined whether or not the D5 bit is "1", or it may be determined whether or not the D4 bit is "1". In either case, when the relevant bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".
Note that, as is clear from the above, in Example 1 (step S431) of FIG. 51 as well, the D7 bit (or D6, D5, or D4 bit) of the H register value is referenced to determine if the operation result is less than "0". It is also possible to determine whether or not there is.

Furthermore, as is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether the advantageous section clear counter is "0" or not is determined. The judgment (step S424), the judgment as to whether the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value (step S434), and the initialization of information regarding the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the current game. , executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit as a result of playing a game with the number of bets (specified number) "2", the advantageous section ends. do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 at a period of 2.235 ms (however, the time period is not limited to this) in parallel with the main process.
When proceeding to the interrupt processing in step S451, in step S452, as initial processing, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed. Here, since the registers of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing are used in the interrupt processing, the current register values are saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, an interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is done because, for example, a request to execute an interrupt process may be made during execution of a power-off process.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process for detecting whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. Note that the interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process that subtracts the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether the minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed or not is included.

Next, the process advances to step S456 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process in which the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) are lit according to the state of the slot machine 10.
Note that there are two types of errors that occur in the slot machine 10: unrecoverable errors and recoverable errors. For unrecoverable errors, an error display is output by the main process (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but for recoverable errors Error display is performed by this LED display control every time an interrupt is processed.

Next, the process advances to step S457, and reading processing for the input port 51 is performed. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, input signals of various sensors are read, and data based on the input port 51 (level data, rising data, falling data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.

In the next step S458, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range. Here, read the setting value data stored at address "F000 (H)" and check whether the range of the setting value data is within the normal range (whether the setting value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). ) to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and when it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process proceeds to irreversible error processing. The error in this case is referred to as an "E6" error in this embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In step S459, a built-in random number check process is performed. In this embodiment, a flag is provided that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random number for lottery winnings is detected (such as when the random number update is slow), the error flag is turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S460, where it is determined whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on or not), and when it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461, where the error is detected. If it is determined that this has occurred, the process advances to step S470 to proceed to irreversible error processing. The error display content at this time is "E7".

In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed for each reel 31 (left, middle, right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, start of deceleration, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process advances to step S462, and port output processing is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel), the hopper motor 36, and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, input error checking processing is executed. This process is a process for determining whether there is any abnormality in the various sensors.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (unsent control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when a control command is set in the command buffer, this step S464 is executed in interrupt processing after that point (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the next interrupt processing after that point). A control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S465, data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in a register. Then, in the next step S466, an external signal is output (transmission of the signal to the external centralized terminal board 100) from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33).
Next, the process advances to step S467, and ratio display preparation processing is performed. This process is a process that updates a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputs segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, random number update processing is performed. Next, the process advances to step S469, where the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the number of credits display LED 76, the number of acquisitions display LED 78, the status display LED 79 (79a to 79f), the setting value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on/off by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. controlled.
Furthermore, for each interrupt process, if a control command that has not yet been sent to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer, the process to send it is performed.

Note that during unrecoverable error processing, no interrupt processing is performed (interrupt processing is suspended until normal recovery occurs).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processes based on the abnormal data (updating data in the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, sending control commands to the sub-control board 80), etc. are executed. To prevent this, interrupts themselves are prohibited.
When an unrecoverable error occurs and an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off detection signal was on in the previous interrupt process. Here, when the voltage falls below a predetermined value (in the example of FIG. 3, V1 or less), a predetermined input signal is detected by a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50. Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal is input. Further, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If it is determined in the previous interrupt processing that the power-off detection signal is on, the process advances to step S482, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that it is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S483.
When it is determined "Yes" in both steps S481 and S482 (when the power-off detection signal is input for two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that a power-off has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. Through this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reels 31 are rotating) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while paying out medals), the driving is stopped.
Next, the process advances to step S484, and the power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process of storing data indicating that normal power-off processing has been executed in the RWM 53.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum that includes the work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and examples of target program use areas include the program work area, unused area, and stack area.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not calculation of the entire checksum range has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue calculation of the checksum. On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculation has been completed, the process advances to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also called complement data) that becomes "0" when all the data in the program use area and the value stored in the above-mentioned predetermined address are added at the time of checksum of the RWM 53. ).
When the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, all data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data thus calculated is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process advances to step S488, and a reset wait state is entered. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, so in step S488, the state waits for the output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process for outputting "00000000(B)" from output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting "00000000(B)" from the output port 4, similar to the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. This process updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter by shifting it to the right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether the LED display counter is "0" or not, and when it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S496. .
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, processing is executed to change the LED display counter "00000000(B)" to "00010000(B)". Then, the process advances to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, the process advances to step S497, and error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are acquired. Here, the storage area of the RWM 53 stores a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, and LED display data indicating on/off of the game start display LED 79d to replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79. A storage area and (1 to 3) a storage area for storing bet display data indicating on/off of the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Unused D1: Unused D2: Unused D3: "1" when the game can be started, "0" when the game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay wins, "0" when replay does not win
D6: Unused D7: Unused Note that the D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the bet display data is configured as follows.
When 0 pieces are bet: 00000000
When betting 1 card: 00000001
When betting 2 cards: 00000011
When betting 3 cards: 00000111
Note that bits D0 to D2 of the bet display data correspond to segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 32.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Further, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed (combined), and the result of the operation is set as segment data for the output port 3. When the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed, data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is turned on or off is obtained. When there is a request to display digit 5 ("Yes" in step S516), this segment data is output from output port 3.
Next, the process advances to step S499, and the register in which segment data for output port 4 is set is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is stored. to judge. If it is determined to be "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process advances to step S516. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of this embodiment includes LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and (number of credits, number of payouts, setting value, display during setting change, press order) An LED segment table 2 defining segment data for displaying instruction information and specified number of instructions) is provided, and is stored in the used area of the ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the start address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, offset and segment data are defined in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501 as follows.
Offset "0": Segment data that displays "0" Offset "1": Segment data that displays "1" Offset "2": Segment data that displays "2" Offset "3": Displays "3" Segment data Offset "4": Segment data to display "4" Offset "5": Segment data to display "5" Offset "6": Segment data to display "6" Offset "7": Segment data to display "7" Segment data to display Offset "8": Segment data to display "8" Offset "9": Segment data to display "9" Offset "A": Segment data to display "=" Offset "B": "A" Segment data to display

For example, first, if payout number data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the payout number data is "1" and the offset of the lower digit is "0". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "1" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "0" is obtained.
For example, secondly, if the setting change display data "88 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the setting change display data is "8", and the lower digit The offset of is "8". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "8" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, thirdly, for example, if the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number will be "A", and the offset of the lower digit will be "A". The offset will be "1". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data that displays "=" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data that displays "1" is obtained.
Furthermore, fourthly, for example, if the specified prescribed number display data "0B(H)" is stored in the obtained number data, the offset of the upper digit is "0" and the offset of the lower digit is "B". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "0" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "A" is obtained.

Next, the process advances to step S502, and first, setting value data is acquired. Here, the setting value data stored at address "F000(H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data and stored in the A register. This set value display data becomes an offset value when displaying the set value.
As will be described later, the segment data stored at the address (in the LED segment table 1 or 2) of the value obtained by adding the offset value to the start address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is acquired.
Next, the process advances to step S503, and it is determined whether there is a request to display set values. Here, if the D register value is "00010000 (B)" and the setting is being changed or confirmed, it is determined that there is a request to display the setting value. When it is determined that there is a request to display the set value, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S504.

In step S504, credit number data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, an offset for upper digits is acquired. This process executes an operation to divide the credit number data (A register value) acquired in step S504 by "10 (D)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the E register. It is processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the number of credits. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the number of credits. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S513. . On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the number of credits, the process advances to step S508.

In step S508, the acquisition number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, in the acquisition number data, the payout number data is stored at the timing when medals are paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination. Furthermore, at the timing when the settings are being changed, display data "88 (H)" is stored during the settings change. Furthermore, when it is time to instruct a specified number, specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored. Furthermore, at the timing when the instruction function is activated (the press order is notified), a press order instruction number "=x (x=any one of 1 to 6)" is stored. Then, any of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether this applies when an error is displayed. This process reads the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497), determines whether it is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed, and step S510 If the value is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed, and the process advances to step S511.
In step S510, an LED segment table 1 for error display is set. Note that a description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 will be omitted. In step S510, processing is executed to store the start address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register. Therefore, in this case, the start address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) in place of the start address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, an offset for the upper digits is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), an operation is performed to divide the B register value by "10 (D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when it is not an error display (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting change display data, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to "10 ( D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S513.

Proceeding to step S513, the offset for the lower digits is acquired. This process is a process for storing data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit values and lower digit values are exchanged between the A register and the E register. Then, the process advances to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is acquired. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (start address of LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data (offset value) stored in the A register, and This process stores the segment data (of Table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process (step S522) to be described later, segment data for digits 1b to 4b is not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, when the result in step S503 is "Yes" (set value display request), and the segment data for displaying the set value is acquired in step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, the process advances to step S516, and it is determined whether there is a request to display digit 5 or not. Here, a request to display digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". If it is determined that there is a request to display digit 5, the process advances to step S520, and if it is determined that there is no request to display digit 5, the process advances to step S517.

In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as segment data for output port 3. Note that when "Yes" in step S516 (when there is a request to display digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for output port 3.

In the next step S518, data for the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is obtained, and it is determined whether the value is "0" or not. If the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether the digit lit in the current interrupt process is digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that it is the timing to turn on the digit 4a. In this case, the data obtained by ORing the segment data set in step S517 and "10000000" is set as the segment data for output port 3. As a result, data is set that allows segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of digit 4a to light up.

Next, the process advances to step S519, and the segment data for output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) from being lit when there is no request to display digit 5 ("No" in step S516).
The process then proceeds to step S520, where the digit signal is output from output port 2 and the segment signal is output from output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as digit data of output port 2 and output from output port 2.
Furthermore, the data of the segment signal output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 is lit) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 are lit).

Next, the process advances to step S521, and a segment signal is output from output port 4. The data of the segment signal output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a setting value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no setting value display request). In other words, when the segment data for output port 4 is cleared in step S519, "00000000(B)" is output from output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522, where the process moves to ratio display processing (processing for lighting up the management information display LED 74). Note that in this embodiment, a description of the ratio display process will be omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous section display LED 77 and a power outage (when a power outage occurs while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit) will be explained.
In the interrupt process, when a power outage is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps, but in this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power outage.
After the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is determined "No" in step S208, so if the power-off recovery is normal, step The process advances to the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, and as described above, this range is an unused area of the RWM 53. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag at address "F062(H)" is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter of address "F051(H)".

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, from step S262 onwards, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. Further, when "No" in step S512, there is a request to display the digit 4a. In this case, if it is not an error display ("No" in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", the D7 bit of the segment data is set to "1" in step S518, and the segment Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is cut off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again when the interrupt process is executed in the power cut recovery process.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is on, "Yes" is determined in step S208, and the process moves to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous section display LED flag of address "F062(H)". Note that when it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including address "F062(H)") is initialized.

Therefore, by initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, even if "1" indicating lighting has been stored up to that point, it becomes "0" indicating turning off.
Thereafter, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interrupt is activated, in the LED display control (FIG. 55), the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 when the timing for lighting the set value display LED 73 comes. Then, in step S240 in FIG. 39, the set value becomes changeable (the set value is changed by turning on the setting change switch).

In addition, in the case where the interrupt processing is started in step S233 in FIG. 39 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, even when the timing for lighting digit 4a comes, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag has already been set to "0'', the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on and the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Further, even if the setting change processing is finished and the main processing is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

In addition, in the main process of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a power outage occurs during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, while the reel 31 is rotating, the following will occur. .
When a power outage is detected in the interrupt process, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54, so the drive signal for the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops due to the power cut.

Next, when power is supplied, the state returns to the state before the power was cut off through the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the same drive signal for the motor 32 as before power-off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 before the power is turned off is a signal that maintains a constant speed state. In this embodiment, it is assumed that when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, one interrupt (2.235 ms) causes one step drive. However, even if a constant speed drive signal is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after the drive has been stopped, the motor 32 cannot be driven because its rotational torque is weak.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (does not cut the index). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is re-accelerated (re-operated). The motor 32 is accelerated by, for example, first driving one step at 20 interrupts (20 x 2.235 = 44.7 ms), then driving one step at 16 interrupts, and then driving one step at 12 interrupts, etc. This is a method of driving one step in gradually decreasing time. The acceleration state requires a time of about 100 steps, for example. Thereby, rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and an interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter. When the value is such that digit 3a lights up ("00000100 (B)" in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)" after 4 interrupts from that point, and digit 4a (advantageous section display LED 77) lights up. The timing has come.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 with "1" to several steps remaining), and after the power is turned on, Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and re-acceleration is performed, as described above, it will take at least several dozen interruptions before the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches a constant speed state. It takes.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters a constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. That is, when the stop switch 42 becomes ready for operation, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

In addition, when the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to dozens of interrupts will occur after the interrupt is activated until it is determined that the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31. It takes. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the motor 32 accelerates again.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up before the reel 31 rotates again and returns to the constant speed state after the power is restored from the power cut.

In addition, in the main process of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a power failure occurs while the hopper motor 36 is being driven in the medal payout process for winning in step S294, the following will occur. . Note that, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process shown in FIG. 49, the hopper motor 36 is driven in step S398, and when each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detects the movable piece 39a as shown in FIG. , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. The hopper motor 36 continues to be driven until it is determined that medals corresponding to the number of payouts have been paid out.
During medal dispensing, if a power outage is detected in the interrupt process before all medals are dispensed, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when power is supplied, the process returns to step S294 (medal payout process due to winning) of the main process (FIG. 41) through the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same way as before the power was cut off. Note that, as shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process due to winnings in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power-off, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous period display LED 77) arrives within four interrupts, as described above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal is approximately 100 ms, although it cannot be generalized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before returning to the medal payout process due to winnings after the power is cut off and before paying out the remaining medals. In other words, when the medal payout process for winning is completed after the power is restored from the power cut, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that point.

Further, as a method for preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off momentarily when there is a momentary power interruption, the following method can be mentioned.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power outage is detected, the outputs of all ports 52 are turned off in step S483, so after this process, the digit signal from output port 2 and the segment signal from output port 3 are is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is segment P of digit 4a, goes out.

Therefore, the process advances to step S488 in FIG. 54, and after waiting for reset, if the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", an on signal of the D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and, An example of this is to output a D7 bit (segment P) on signal from output port 3. Note that in the loop processing after proceeding to step S488 in FIG. 54 and waiting for reset, no interrupt processing occurs, so the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is always lit (statically lit). Thereby, even if a momentary power outage occurs, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off visually.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In this embodiment, the segment P of digit 4a is set as the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. Then, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when a power outage is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 will be prevented from turning off in the event of a momentary power outage. can do.

Next, the display of the difference number of sheets on the sub-control board 80 side will be explained. The sub-control board 80 displays an image of the difference number of sheets on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in this embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is provided with the following storage areas.
has the following:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number of coins counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Number of pullback games counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to turning on/off the AT flag to the sub control board 80 every game. Note that the command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side changes from off to on, and when it changes from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives the AT flag on/off information from the main control board 50 and turns on/off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores information that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side has changed from off to on (AT flag rising data) and that it has changed from on to off (AT flag falling data). .

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game number counter every game during AT, and when the AT game number counter reaches "0", ends AT. Furthermore, when the difference counter becomes "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", the AT (and the advantageous section) ends.
The main control board 50 executes initialization processing of the difference counter when ending the AT and advantageous sections, so the difference counter becomes "0" when the game shifts from the next game to the normal section.

On the other hand, the sub control board 80 includes a sub difference number counter that counts the difference number of sheets during AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" at the start of the AT (excluding when the AT is won and the AT is started during the pullback period, which will be described later), and thereafter, the difference number is updated every game. It should be noted that when a digit decrease occurs, unlike the difference counter of the main control board 50, it is not corrected to "0" and the digit remains as it is.

For example, when starting AT,
1st game: Non-winning role (difference number of sheets “-3”)
2nd game: Non-winning role (difference number of sheets “-3”)
3rd game: Winning the push order bell (difference number of sheets “+5”)
4th game: Non-winning role (difference number of sheets “-3”)
5th game: Winning the push order bell (difference number of sheets “+5”)
Assume that
In this case, the sub-difference number counter (2-byte counter) is
1st game: 0 (H) - 3 (H) = FFFD (H)
2nd game: FFFD (H) - 3 (H) = FFFA (H)
3rd game: FFFA (H) + 5 (H) = FFFF (H)
4th game: FFFF (H) - 3 (H) = FFFC (H)
5th game: FFFC (H) + 5 (H) = 0001 (H)
will be updated.

Note that when a replay win occurs, the sub-difference number counter is not updated, similar to the difference number counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-difference number may be calculated by setting the number of payouts to "0" in the game at the time of replay winning, and setting the number of bets in the next game (at the time of replay) to "0".
Further, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when ending the advantageous section, but the sub difference number counter of the sub control means 80 does not change the AT (advantageous section). Even if the initialization process is completed, the initialization process may not be executed immediately and the count may not be stopped. When the sub control board 80 ends AT and continues counting the sub difference number counter, the sub control board 80 turns on the pullback flag (to "1").

The sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value at the end of AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value. Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds the predetermined value (or is equal to or greater than the predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. When AT ends when the sub-difference number counter approaches the upper limit value, when AT is pulled back, the sub-difference number counter value may reach the upper limit value immediately, so in such a case, , so that the difference number of sheets is not carried over to the next AT.

The pullback flag is a flag for determining whether the AT was pulled back (whether or not the player won again) within a predetermined number of games (“50” games in this embodiment) after the end of the AT.
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and the pullback game counter is set to "50 (D)". The pullback game count counter is for counting the number of games after the AT ends (during the pullback period). At the end of the AT, the pullback game counter is set to ``50 (D)'', and thereafter, if the AT is not won, ``1'' continues to be subtracted every game. Then, when the pullback game number counter reaches "0", the AT pullback has failed, the pullback flag is turned off, and the sub difference number of coins counter is cleared (initialized).
After the AT ends, the sub control board 80 updates the sub difference number counter when the pullback flag is on.

Also, during the pullback period (when the pullback flag is on), if you win a special role such as BB and execute a special game such as a BB game, the pullback game count counter will be subtracted (updated) during the special game. )do not.
On the other hand, when the AT is won before the pullback game count counter reaches "0", the AT pullback is successful, and in subsequent ATs, the number of coins inherited from the previous AT's difference number is displayed as an image.
for example,
The difference in the number of coins at the first AT: +1000 sheets The difference in the number of sheets from the end of the first AT until winning the second AT: -100 sheets, then the difference in the number of sheets at the start of the second AT is "+900 sheets". The image is displayed.

Further, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub-difference sheet number counter is set. In this embodiment, the settings are as follows.
1) Upper limit during AT: 2414 (D)
2) When the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize stops during AT and the number of coins that can be acquired in the special game related to the special prize (estimated difference number of coins) is "250 (D)", the upper limit value: "2414 (D)" )-250(D)=2164(D)”
3) Upper limit during pullback period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during AT, further counting of the sub difference number of sheets is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In this embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number of sheets displayed as images on the image display device 23 are linked (coinciding). For example, when the sub difference number counter reaches "1000 (D)" during AT, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "Number of sheets acquired during AT: 1000 sheets".

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", the AT (and advantageous section) ends. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, for the sub-difference number counter on the sub-control board 80 side, the maximum value that can be counted is set to "2414 (D)" in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub difference number of sheets counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum number of difference sheets displayed as an image on the image display device 23 is "2414 sheets". As a result, it is possible to prevent an image displaying an excessively large difference in the number of sheets, and to prevent an image display that greatly arouses the desire for gambling.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), when the number of coins that can be acquired in the BB game is 250, if the BB is won during AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is When it is stopped and displayed, the value of the sub-difference sheet counter at that time is determined. When the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-mentioned "2164 (D)", it will exceed "2414 (D)" at the end of the BB game, so when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference Clear the number of sheets counter (2) above).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays "Congratulations", "Congratulations", etc. as an image display corresponding to the difference in the number of sheets. In addition, in this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" etc. from the beginning of the BB game, the sub difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference number counter is kept until it exceeds "2414 (D)". The counter may continue to count, and when it exceeds "2414 (D)", the sub-difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, the difference in number of sheets may increase during the withdrawal period. For example, there is a case where a special winning combination is won during the pullback period and the difference number counter value increases as a result of playing the special game.
In particular, if the specification is such that when a specific BB is won, the AT will be won, after the BB game ends, the game will shift to the AT. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, even if the difference number is taken over at AT after the BB game ends, the upper limit value will be reached immediately. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the pullback period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, if you win a BB with AT during the AT withdrawal period and play the BB game, if the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final BB game, Clear the sub difference number counter. As a result, the display of the difference number of sheets starts from "0" in the AT after the BB ends.

As described above, even if the special game is entered during the withdrawal period, the withdrawal game counter is not decremented during the special game. When a special winning combination is won during the pullback period, updating of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or may be interrupted during the special game. An example of suspending the update is, for example, if you win a BB with AT when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter value is set to "1000 (D)". Stop at. Even if "250" coins are obtained in the subsequent BB game, these "250" coins are not added to the sub-difference coin counter. Therefore, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference in number of coins starts from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub difference number counter, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", you win a BB with AT, and in the subsequent BB game " When the player obtains ``250'' pieces, the sub difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes ``1250 (D)''. Then, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number of coins starts from "1250".
In addition, when continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, if the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1800 (D)", you win a BB with AT, and in the subsequent BB game you win "250 (D)". When the number of coins is acquired, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)", which exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from "0" at AT after the end of the BB game.

In addition, the sub-difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets, but in this embodiment, the difference number of the game is updated only when the game is started with a predetermined number of bets. Update the number.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets in the game.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is defined as when the number of bets (regular number) is "3", and when the game is started with the number of bets (regular number) "2". does not update the difference number of sheets in that game.

Next, the sub difference number counter management process will be explained using a flowchart.
FIGS. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG. 56.
In step S531 of FIG. 56, the sub control board 80 determines whether the AT flag is on (whether or not AT is currently in progress). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process advances to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process advances to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. That is, during non-AT and when the pullback flag is off, the sub difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the number of bets for the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command that can determine the number of bets for the game to the sub-control board 80. When it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process advances to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether the number of bets (specified number) is "3" based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub difference number counter is updated only when the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or withdrawal period, if the number of bets is other than "3", the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub-control board 80 subtracts the number of bets ("3") from the sub-difference number counter. Next, the process advances to step S536, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41, after the display determination is made in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command that allows the number of payouts to be determined to the sub control board 80.
If it is determined in step S536 that a payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub control board 80 adds the number of payouts to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub control board 80 determines whether the AT flag is on. When it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S547 in FIG.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag has been turned on in the current game (whether or not the AT flag has been turned on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in the current game, the process advances to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on in the current game (the rise of the AT flag is off), the process advances to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 when it has been AT since before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. For example, if the AT flag is turned on in the current game ("Yes" in step S539) and the pullback flag is off ("No" in step S540, that is, when the pullback period is not in progress), at this point the sub-difference number Since the counter is "0", there is no need to update the sub-difference sheet number counter, so the process according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. In the next step S542, the sub control board 80 clears the pullback game counter. Here, when "Yes" in step S539 and "Yes" in step S540, this corresponds to a case where AT is won during the pullback period. Therefore, in this case, the pullback flag is turned off and the pullback game counter is cleared.
Next, the process proceeds to step S543, and the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference sheet number counter exceeds the upper limit value "2414 (D)". If it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)", the process advances to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This may occur if the number of difference sheets increases during the pullback period after the end of AT and the sub difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, in step S543, when it is determined that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub-control board 80 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. Determine whether or not. Note that when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
“Yes” in this step S544 is a case where the BB with AT is won during the pullback period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that in a game where BB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped and displayed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546, where the sub difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S545 that the sub difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)" (while maintaining the sub difference number counter value), the process according to this flowchart is ended.

As mentioned above, if the BB game of this embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 coins as shown in FIG. 26 (9th embodiment), the sub difference number of coins counter will be "2164 (D)" at the start of the BB game. If it exceeds , it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, at the start of the BB game (before the start), it is determined whether the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game, and when it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value, the BB game This is to clear the sub-difference number counter before starting. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub-difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number is not displayed. Instead of displaying the number of sheets, for example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed.

When it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on, and the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. , that is, whether or not AT has been completed in the current game. If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned off in the current game, the process advances to step S548, and if it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned off in the current game (the falling edge of the AT flag is off), the process advances to step S551. .

In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". If it is determined that the sub-difference sheet number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S550, and the sub-control board 80 sets an initial value "50 (D)" to the pullback game counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Through the above steps S548 to S550, if the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and the initial value of the number of pullback games is set to "50 (D)". Set. The reason why "50 (D)" is set as the initial value of the number of pullback games is to make AT pullback within 50 games a continuous AT chance (a condition for carrying over the sub-difference number of coins to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pullback games is not limited to "50 (D)" but can be set to various values such as "30 (D)" or "100 (D)" depending on the specifications.
Also, if the sub-difference number counter is 2000 (D) or more at the end of AT, even if you pull back AT afterwards, there is a possibility that the sub-difference number counter will exceed the upper limit during AT after pulling back. is high, so in such a case, the pullback flag is not set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. In other words, if the sub-difference number counter is equal to or greater than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the sub-difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the AT is subsequently performed.

Further, when proceeding from step S547 to step S551, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in BB operation (BB game in progress). Note that the information on the operating state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
If it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S553, "1" is subtracted from the pullback game counter. In other words, during the pullback period, when the BB is in operation (BB game), the update (subtraction) process of the pullback game counter is not executed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the pullback game number counter may be decremented even during the BB game during the pullback period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback game counter has reached "0". When it is determined that the pullback game number counter is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback game number counter is "0", the process advances to step S555.

In step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pullback game counter is cleared. In addition, when "Yes" in step S554, since the pullback game number counter is "0", the clearing process of the pullback game number counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, if the answer is "No" in step S560, which will be described later, the pullback game counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, the process advances to step S557, and the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game counter is "0" (cleared), the sub-difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and after that it remains "0" until AT starts. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is in operation and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the last game in which the BB is in operation (BB game). The determination as to whether or not this is the final game of the BB game may be made by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the sub-control board 80 side, or by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game, or by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game. The judgment may be made based on the command that is sent.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process advances to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S560, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S561, and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. As a result, when a BB game is executed when the pullback flag is on, and the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the last game of the BB game, the pullback period (50 games) is restarted from the next game. ) will be newly set. In other words, when the number of withdrawal games is set to the initial value "50" after the AT ends, a BB game is executed during the withdrawal period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, , the number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference sheet number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S555. After step S555, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the pullback period. In this way, in the final game of the BB game, if the withdrawal period is in progress, the sub-difference number of coins at that time is determined, and if the sub-difference number is "2000 (D)" or more, the withdrawal period ends. .

In the sub-difference number counter management described above, the sub-difference number counter is updated at the timing when a bet command is received. That is, the sub difference number of sheets is updated before all the reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, since the difference counter is executed in the advantageous section counter management of the game completion check process, the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, the sub-difference number counter may also perform subtraction of the bet number and addition of the payout number after all reels 31 are stopped, similarly to the difference number counter.

Furthermore, even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if a digit decrease occurs), the sub-difference number counter stores the value (the digit decrease value). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the difference counter, when the sub difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a downturn occurs), it may be corrected to "0".
Furthermore, even if the specification is such that the sub difference number counter may be negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number "0".

In this case, the following processing may be considered.
As described above, the sub difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit is "2414(D)" or "096E(H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)". Therefore, by determining whether the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)", it is possible to determine whether or not a digit has fallen. When it is determined that a digit drop has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number of sheets to be displayed on the image display device 23 may be set to "0".

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be applied to a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)). A sub-bonus is one in which the number of games played, the number of coins paid out, or the difference number of coins is set as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether the sub-bonus symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in step S551, it is determined whether or not a sub-bonus game is being played. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not this is the final game of the sub-bonus game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, a prescribed number (bet number) is instructed before the start of the game.
Note that the display of the push order instruction information is the operation of an instruction function (processing related to the instruction function), and here, the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not an operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the accessory condition device, the prescribed number for each RT, and the winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), the accessory condition device (special combination) includes BB1 and BB2. When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the game shifts to BB1 game. The BB1 game ends when more than 100 coins are paid out. After the BB1 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT.
Further, when BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops, the game shifts to BB2 game. The BB2 game ends when more than 30 coins are paid out. After the BB2 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, BB1 in operation, and BB2 in operation.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If you win BB1 in a non-RT, you will move into BB1, and if you win BB2, you will move into BB2.
The inside of BB1 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops within BB1, the game shifts to BB1 operation, that is, BB1 game. Similarly, the inside of BB2 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, the game shifts to BB2 operation, that is, a BB2 game.
Note that the number of special winnings that can be carried over is limited to one. Therefore, when BB1 is inside, BB2 does not win. Similarly, if BB2 is inside, BB1 will not be elected.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the prescribed number is limited to "3" during BB1 operation and BB2 operation (accessory object operation). The game cannot be started with a bet number of "1" or "2".
On the other hand, the specified number in non-RT, inside BB1, and inside BB2 when the accessory is not activated is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58(C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". Further, the advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the advantageous section lottery number is "16384", it means that the probability of winning the advantageous section is "16384/16384".
Further, as shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, when the specified number is "2", BB2 is drawn, but BB1 is not drawn. On the other hand, when the specified number is "3", BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when the specified number of non-RTs is "3" or the specified number within BB2 is "3", an advantageous section can be drawn by lottery. In the lottery for advantageous sections, it is set so that the winning section is always won, except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section almost an advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment has the above-mentioned "7P" type specifications.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played within BB2 and with a specified number of "3". Then, AT is drawn at random within BB2, and when AT is won, AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2, whose winnings have been carried over, will not be allowed to win.
For example, if you are currently a non-RT, you need to move from a non-RT to inside BB2 (to win BB2 as a non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play the game with the specified number of "2".
Therefore, if the current status is non-RT, the game is played with the specified number "2" to win BB2, and the game is moved to BB2 from the next game. Furthermore, since the lottery for the advantageous section is received within BB2 when the prescribed number is "3", the game is played with the prescribed number of "3" within BB2.

In addition, BB2, which won with the specified number "2," cannot stop displaying that symbol combination unless the specified number is "2." Similarly, BB1, which won with the specified number "3", cannot display that symbol combination on the active line unless the specified number is "3".
Therefore, if you win BB2 with the specified number "2" in a non-RT, move into BB2, and proceed with the game with the specified number "3", even if the winning combination is not won, BB2 The symbol combination corresponding to will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.
In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, the design combination that corresponds to the winning special prize is stopped, the symbol combination is moved to a special game, and the number of medals is increased in the special game. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), non-RT players can win BB2 with a probability of about "1/5", so they can quickly move from non-RT players to BB2 players.
Furthermore, within BB2, when winning a small winning combination or a replay, there is a 100% probability that you will win an advantageous section. Therefore, within BB2, most of the gaming periods are advantageous periods. Note that it is of course possible to set the probability of winning in the advantageous section to less than 100%.

Further, the instruction function can be activated (processing related to the instruction function can be executed) only when a game is played with a specified number of players, particularly “3” in this embodiment. Therefore, if you win AT during the advantageous section inside BB2 and the AT is executed, if you start the game with the specified number "3" and win the push order bell, by activating the instruction function, , press order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (bet number) "2" during AT, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell is won.

Further, as in the eleventh embodiment, even when a game is played with a specified number of "2" during AT, the difference counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game, and Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game count counter (AT difference number counter in the case of a difference number management type AT) is not updated. On the other hand, when a game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the difference counter, advantageous section clear counter, and AT game count counter (in the case of a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) Update about everything.
Furthermore, regardless of the specified number, RT is always transferred when the transfer condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination that satisfies the transfer condition is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, the main game state (normal, CZ, AT, etc.) may be set so that it can be transferred to any specified number, or the game may be played with one specified number (for example, "3"). You may also set it so that it can be migrated only when.

Inside BB2, if a game is started with the specified number "2" due to a player's operation error and the winning combination is not won in that game, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that carries over winning can be stopped and displayed. becomes. On the other hand, if a player starts a game with the specified number of ``2'' due to an operational error and wins any of the winning combinations in that game, the winning combination in that game will have priority. The symbol combination corresponding to BB2, which has a winning status, is not stopped and displayed. However, if you win a replay in that game, the next game will also be played with a bet number of "2", so the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that has the win will be stopped and displayed in the next game as well. there is a possibility.

If the game is started with the specified number "2" in BB2 and AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT (AT). Then, in this non-RT, information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the player is informed that the game should be played with the specified number "2" (specified number instruction). . This is to make the player play the game with the specified number "2", make BB2 win, and move the player into BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the prescribed number "2" is specified until BB2 is won.

As described above, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number "2" on the acquired number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. Note that the instruction for the specified number of "2" is not limited to "0A", and may be any other display if it is not confused with any of the payout number, setting change display "88", error number, and push order instruction information. It may be. For example, since the maximum number of medals displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number "2".

Further, in this embodiment, the specified number is specified only during AT, and the specified number is not specified during non-AT. For example, when the game shifts to non-RT after finishing the BB2 game, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not specified. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play the game with the prescribed number "2" and transfer it to the BB2 at his/her own discretion.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantageous section, if a game is played with the specified number of "3" and the player wins the small winning combination or replay, the player also wins in the advantageous section. Then, when it is a non-RT and advantageous section, the specified number "2" may be specified (even if it is a non-AT).
Furthermore, without being limited to the above, when transitioning to non-RT, the specified number "2" may be specified regardless of AT/non-AT, advantageous section/non-advantageous section.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when the player places a bet number of "2", the specified number may not be specified, and when the player places a bet number of "3", the specified number may be specified. In the main process of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined in the medal management process of step S276, but if it is determined that the current number of bets is "2", the specified number "2" is not specified. (Execute the process to clear the acquired number data), and if the current bet number is "3", specify the specified number "2" (memorize the specified specified number display data as the acquired number data). Can be mentioned.

Further, when finishing the BB2 game and moving to non-RT, wait processing may be executed at the end of the last game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot proceed (progress of the main process shown in FIG. 41). Therefore, after the wait process is completed, the process moves to the game start set process for the next game (non-RT), and the specified number is specified there.

In non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, the game may be completed in one game, or may be played over multiple games.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when playing a game with the specified number of "2" in non-RT, there is a possibility of winning a replay (normal replay, watermelon replay, cherry replay). When a replay is won as a result of playing a game with the specified number "2," it is optional whether or not to specify the specified number "2" in the next game. In non-RT and AT, the prescribed number "2" may be specified before the start of the game, regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to replay has stopped or not, until BB2 is won. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (bet number) in the next game (replay), so it is recommended not to specify the specified number in that game. You may also do so.

This also applies, for example, when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed as a result of playing a game with the specified number "3" in non-RT and AT. In the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the prescribed number (bet number), so the prescribed number may not be specified in this case as well. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the specified number "2" may be specified for the purpose of calling attention to the player.
If a game is played with the specified number "2" in non-RT and AT, and you win BB2 and move to BB2 from the next game, the specified number will not be specified unless you change to non-RT again. will not be carried out.

Further, the timing for instructing the specified number is after all the reels 31 have stopped, and when there is a payout based on winning a small winning combination, after the payout process is finished, and the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. before (for example, before it becomes possible to bet on medals (before bets are accepted)). Therefore, after a payout is made based on the winning of a small winning combination in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number "2" is specified before the start of the next game (non-RT). As shown in FIG. 42 (11th embodiment), in step S321 of the game start setting process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets a specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. It is determined that it satisfies the requirements.

If it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the instruction condition for the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, where "0B (H)” is memorized.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of lighting up digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the upper digit of the specified specified number display data "0B (H)" is set in step S511. The offset “0(H)” is acquired, and segment data for displaying “0” is acquired based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "0" is displayed on the digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Furthermore, at the timing of lighting up the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the lower digit offset "B(H)" is acquired in step S513 from the specified specified number display data "0B(H)". In step S514, segment data for displaying "A" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "A" is displayed on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start setting process in step S272 is a process before it becomes possible to bet and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the specified number of instructions is displayed.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42, after the designated specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data in step S322, automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when specifying the specified number in the next game when a replay prize is won, the specified number is specified before the automatic bet is placed. This makes it possible to quickly instruct the player about the prescribed number.
Further, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquisition number data (specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing after step S280, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, the information "0A" corresponding to the specified specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the specified number "2", the specified function is not activated even during AT. It doesn't work. That is, even if the player wins the push order bell in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78. This is because, in this embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the case where the specified number is "3". Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78, the obtained number display LED 78 The display is "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" was displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the game was played with the specified number "3" and the push order bell was won. When this happens, press order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the obtained number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the specified number "3"), " After displaying "00", if the push order bell is won, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed.

Further, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. Note that since the acquisition number data is cleared in step S280 after operating the start switch 41, the process of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Then, when a small winning combination is won and the medal payout process due to the winning is executed in step S294, the acquired number data is incremented by "1", so the acquired number display LED 78 displays the number of paid out. Ru.

Then, when proceeding to the game start setting process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, information corresponding to the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Furthermore, when displaying the information corresponding to the specified specified number, the specified specified number display data is stored as the obtained number data, but at this point, the payout number data of the previous game may be stored as the obtained number data. Therefore, before storing the information corresponding to the designated specified number, clearing processing of the acquired number data may be executed. For example, in FIG. 42, before step S311, clearing processing of acquisition number data may be executed.

In addition, in AT and non-RT, even though the specified number "2" was specified, he ignored it and played the game with the specified number "3", winning BB1, moving into BB1, Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute a BB1 game.
In order to suppress such behavior, for example, processing related to the instruction function may not be executed within BB1. Further, in the BB1 game, the payout rate may be set to be less than "1" so that the number of medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
Furthermore, since it is up to the player to decide which specified number to play with, even if the specified number "2" is specified in an AT and non-RT game, even if the game is played with the specified number "3". No penalty will be imposed on the person.

In the above example, when specifying the specified number, the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side), but the invention is not limited to this. In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the designated specified number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing when displaying the specified number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 etc. may be set to be almost the same as the display start timing of displaying the specified number of instructions on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the start of the game). It will be done.
Further, the timing at which the display ends after the specified specified number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or may be different from the timing at which the display ends after the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
The display end timing after displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 etc. is as follows.
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in a game with a specified number of "2" (4) All reels in a game with a specified number of "2" (5) After winning BB2 in a game with the specified number "2" (6) When all reels 31 stop in a game with the specified number "2" and winning BB2, etc.
In addition, when the designated designated number is displayed on a dedicated display, it is possible to continue to display the designated designated number as an image on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<13th embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three.
On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are each four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a top view, and a right side view showing an outline of the configuration including the reel 31 (31A to 31D) and the stop switch 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are shown unobstructed by the front surface of the front door 12. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown so as to be visible. Further, in the right side view, illustration of the medal slot 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front side of the front door 12, and an operation button 24 and a medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 24 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80, and is capable of bidirectional communication with the sub-control board 80. For example, at least a portion of the operation button 24 is formed so that it can be lit, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by controlling the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, when the operation button 24 is operated, the signal thereof is input to the sub-control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a vertical line passing through the midpoints of the four reels 31A to 31D is a line L1 (center line). Line L1 is located at an intermediate position between reels 31B and 31C. The distances between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D are all W1 (uniform). Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to the line L1.
Further, among the four stop switches 42A to 42D, the distances between stop switches 42A and 42B, between stop switches 42B and 42C, and between stop switches 42C and 42D are all W2 (uniform). The line L1 is arranged so as to pass through an intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

Further, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2=W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2>W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2<W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is a line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is a line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (closer to the center) of the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L3.

Furthermore, in the front view, if the interval (distance between centers) of the reels 31 is W3, then the distance between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D is all W3 (constant). It is.
Further, if the distance between the stop switches 42 (distance between centers) is W4, then the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is all W4 (constant distance). ).

Furthermore, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged to intersect with the line L2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be placed on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be placed on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2. It may be placed on the right side (closer to the center).
Further, in the front view, the medal slot 47 is arranged so that the medal slot 47 intersects with the line L4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to intersect with the line L4, for example. Alternatively, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed to be horizontally long, and a line that touches the left end of the operation button 24 is a line L4, and a line that touches the right end of the operation button 24 is a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a part of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

Further, as shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, etc., and in the example shown in FIG. 59, has the shape of an arrow pointing toward the stop switch 42 side. Further, the left index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it may be slightly deviated from the center line). Further, the right index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it may be slightly deviated from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated using the right index 12d as a guide.

When there are three reels 31 and three stop switches 42, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), a maximum of "3!=6" selection pressing orders can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, a maximum of "4!=24" selection pressing orders can be provided.
The greater the number of presses of the stop switch 42, the more the base during non-AT (when the accessory is not activated and during non-AT, the number of out sheets per 100 in sheets. For example, the number of out sheets per 100 in sheets when the accessory is not activated and during non-AT. If the number of out cards is 50, the base is 50.) can be lowered.

When the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is 4, the number of bells to be pressed in the lottery is 1234 bells (stop switches 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicate the correct pressing order), 1243 bells, etc. ., 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. As shown in FIG. 58, if the number of winning positions for each pressing order bell is the same, the winning number for each pressing order bell may be set to "1500". In this way, since the number of winning positions for each push order bell can be set to "1/4", the probability that the push order operated by the player will match the correct push order when the push order bell is won can be reduced accordingly. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three, images such as "123" or "left center right" can be displayed during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the order in which the correct answers are pressed.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be cited as to how to notify the correct pressing order during AT.

For example, a first method is to set the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and notify the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated. It will be done. For example, when the stop switches 42 are pressed in the order of stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, "3412" is notified (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification). ). Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D may be set to "A," "B," "C," and "D," respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" may be notified.

A second method is to apply a color to the base of the reel 31 and/or the stop switch 42 for identification.
For example, the color of the base of the reel 31A and/or the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the base of the reel 31B and/or the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the base of the reel 31C and/or the stop switch 42C is yellow, The color of the base of the reel 31D and/or the stop switch 42D is red (each is a different color). In the above example, instead of the notification "3412", the notification may be "yellow red white blue" (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth (last) among the stop switches 42 to be operated from the first to fourth is displayed darkly (or hidden). can be mentioned. In this case, "brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first > brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second ≧ corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third One example of this is to set the brightness of the image ≧ the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth.
When the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the image corresponds to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth. An example of this is to make the brightness of the image to be the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when the pressing order of "3412" is to be displayed as an image as in the above example, "3●12" is first displayed as an image. In addition, "●" is an image corresponding to the "4th" press order, and it may be darkened (hidden) so that the character "4" is not visible at all, or the "4" character may be hidden. It may be dimmed to the extent that the characters are distinguishable.

When the image "3●12" is displayed, the image is displayed in the same way as when selecting 6, so it becomes easier for the player to intuitively understand the pressing order. When the first stop switch 42C is operated, any of the following 1) to 3) may be executed.
1) Change the display of "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to "●", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34●2".
2) Change "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to a display such as "-" or "○", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34○2".
3) Change "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34*2"("*" means blank).

Furthermore, after the second stop, images such as "34●●", "34--", "34○○", and "34**" may be displayed in the same way as above.
Further, after the third stop, images may be displayed as "●4●●", "-4--", "○4○○", and "*4**".
Alternatively, after the third stop, the image of the push order itself may be erased.
Note that even if the order of all the presses is displayed as "4312" as an image as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 will be displayed. It is preferable to erase the stop switch 42 as described in 1) to 3) above, since this makes it easier to understand which stop switch 42 has been operated. Specifically, after displaying the image "4312", "43●2" (after operating the stop switch 42C) → "43●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D) → "4●●●" (after operating the stop switch 42B) After the operation), an image may be displayed ("●" may also be "○", "-", or "*" as described above).

Furthermore, a fourth method is to notify the pressing order using a four-character compound word. For example, when "spring, summer, fall, and winter" is used as one of the four-character idioms to notify the pressing order, the correct pressing order is "spring→summer→autumn→winter."
When the pressing order is "3412" as described above, an example is to notify (display an image or sound) "Autumn/Winter/Spring/Summer" as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, an image may be displayed as "Autumn/Spring/Summer" before the first stop, and "Autumn/Winter/Summer" after the first stop.
In addition, in any of the first to fourth methods, if a mistake in the push order occurs midway through, the image of the push order may continue to be displayed, or the You may also delete the image.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when a push order bell with 24 options is provided as described above, 24 types of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the press order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", "FF", 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the lottery for the advantageous section was performed only when the winning lottery result became the target lottery result. The reason for this setting is that, as mentioned above, when the lottery result is non-winning (when the conditional device does not operate as a result of the internal lottery), the advantageous section transfer lottery, which is the processing related to the advantageous section, is performed. This is because we thought it would be preferable not to do so. Therefore, it does not necessarily have to be set in this way, and the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process was executed after the advantageous section transfer lottery. Here, a winning lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be in an advantageous section is set, and when the winning lottery result is determined, the advantageous section transfer process (Figure 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transfer lottery. You may. Similarly, a lottery result (winning number) that is always determined by AT is provided, and when the lottery result is determined, AT set processing (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed without executing the AT lottery. may be executed.
In addition, we provide a lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be an advantageous section and AT, and when the winning lottery result is determined, the advantageous section transfer process and AT lottery process are not executed. AT set processing may also be executed.
Further, in the case where a winning lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous section transition lottery is provided, the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed even when the winning lottery result is obtained. In this case, the winning number in the advantageous section may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of AT games is determined, the number of games is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended. However, the AT is not limited to such an AT that manages the number of games, but may also be an AT that manages the number of differential cards. In the case of a difference number management type AT, when an AT is won, an initial value of the obtainable difference number is determined and stored in an AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, each time there is a payout, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.
In the case of such a differential number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is subtracted when the specified number is one (for example, "3"), but when it is another specified number (for example, "2"), the AT Do not subtract the difference number counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting is set to a state where the setting can be changed after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is on before the power is turned off, when the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off before the setting change becomes possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an advantageous section may be displayed after ending the state in which settings can be changed (after "Yes" in step S242 in FIG. 39) and before proceeding to main processing (before step S248). Clearing (initialization) processing of the LED flag may also be executed. In this way, it becomes possible to control the advantageous section display LED 77 to turn off after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one difference counter were provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and two difference counters (important counters) may be provided to confirm consistency.
For example, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided as advantageous section clear counters. During the advantageous section, both the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are updated every time the game is played. Further, for example, in the determination in step S424 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", it is determined whether the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0" or not, or whether the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are Determine whether or not the counter has the same value. If it is determined that the values are "0" or the same value, the process advances to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
A first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided as difference counters. Then, each time a game is played, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated. Further, for example, in the determination in step S434 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first difference counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, it is determined whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. to judge. If it is determined that the values exceed the upper limit or are the same, the process advances to step S435.

If you judge the advantageous section clear counter value and/or the difference counter value as described above, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (incorrect value) due to the influence of noise, the advantageous section clear counter value is "0" and/or whether the difference counter value exceeds the upper limit value can be determined more accurately.
Note that if the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and second difference counter do not match, for example, an error display is displayed and the game does not proceed. (main processing) can be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, and the process proceeds to step S545, where it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When the sub difference number counter is cleared, in that BB game, a special performance different from the normal BB game may be output. A special effect during the BB game can suggest to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared.

In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter is not judged, and in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is set to, for example, "2000 (D)" (this is an example of a threshold value, and this value ) may be determined. When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter is cleared and a special effect (a performance indicating that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. You can also output it.

Furthermore, in the above case, if a power outage occurs during a game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during a BB game (the special effect has not yet been output), the power will be restored from the power outage. The special effect may be output from the game played. In this case, when returning from the power cut, it is sufficient to read the sub-difference number counter value and the fact that a BB game is in progress, and determine whether or not to output a special effect.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the rotation of the reels 31 of a game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during a BB game, the above-mentioned special effect may be output from the game that returns from the power outage. good. Therefore, in this case, if there is no power outage, the special effect will be output from the next game, but if there is a power outage while the reels 31 are rotating, the special effect will be output from that game. Become.

(7) Play the game with the specified number "2" during AT (the instruction function does not operate when the specified number is "2"), win the push order bell, and accidentally operate the stop switch 42 in the correct push order. , When a small winning combination is paid out and the difference sheet counter exceeds ``2400 (D)'', at the end of the game, an effect indicating the end of AT, such as an image display such as ``END'', can be output. preferable. This is to prevent AT from ending in a game in which the correct pressing order is not reported and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(8) On the other hand, as mentioned above, in order to prevent AT from ending in a game where the correct pressing order is not announced, for example, if you play a game with the specified number "2", you will win the pressing order bell. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, the number of payouts for the game is set to ``2'' or less (the difference in the number of coins for the game is ``0'' or less), so that the AT does not end in the game. It's okay.

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub-difference number counter continued counting during the BB game. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when winning a BB during AT and moving to BB gaming, the sub-difference number counter may not be updated (updating of the sub-difference number counter may be interrupted during BB gaming). .
In this case, for example, before step S531 in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the BB is in operation (determined based on the operation state flag). Then, when the BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Further, when the sub-difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processes of step S551 and steps S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 are unnecessary. If "No" in step S547, the process advances to step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) Similarly to the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when a winning combination is not won, the transition lottery for an advantageous section (processing related to an advantageous section) is not executed. As mentioned above, this takes into account the rules. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into account, the transition lottery for the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) is limited to one specified number (in the example of FIG. 58, the specified number is "3") in one gaming state (RT). I decided to do it. This was done in consideration of the fact that according to the rules, the transfer lottery for advantageous sections (processing related to advantageous sections) is limited to one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, unless this point is taken into consideration, advantageous section transition lottery may be executed with a plurality of specified numbers in one gaming state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is specified for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to specify the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played within BB2, and it is irregular for BB2 to win and shift to the BB2 game. However, not limited to this, BB2
After executing AT internally, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, the specification may be such that BB2 is won and the BB2 game is executed. In this case, when the AT end condition is satisfied within BB2, after the end of the game that satisfies the AT end condition (after all reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has been executed when a small prize is won), Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before bets can be made), the specified number "2" is instructed, and the player is encouraged to win BB2. In the twelfth embodiment, BB2 is won with a specified number of “2”, so the specified number for winning BB2 is “2”, but for example, if a BB is provided that wins with a specified number of “1” In order to win the BB, the specified number "1" is specified.
Furthermore, the BB game with such specifications may be a BB game in which medals increase or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When specifying the specified number, it was executed in the game start setting process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in a BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the specified number of games to be played next time is specified during the game end check process. However, in the final game of the BB2 game, when a small winning combination is won and there is a payout, and the number of payouts is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the prescribed number is indicated after the number of payouts is displayed. Note that if the LED for indicating the specified number is a dedicated LED, the specified number for the next game can be instructed to the dedicated LED while the number of payouts is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when executing a freeze in the final game of a BB2 game, when instructing the specified number of games for the next game at the end of the game, the timing is before executing the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze. It may be.

(5) As in the twelfth embodiment, when a game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed. For example, in a game during an advantageous period, in a situation where it is advantageous to play with the specified number "3" (for example, in the case of inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is set only for 3 bets. It can also be set to a button. That is, when the number of credits is "3" and it is during the advantageous period and in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3", when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the setting is made so that "3" bet is placed. do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2", in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3" during the advantageous period, even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" bet will not be placed. Set it as follows.

Alternatively, even if it is possible to play the game with the specified number of "3", if the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the setting is made so that "2" is bet. Good too. In particular, in FIG. 58, in non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set the bet so that when the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" bet is placed.

(6) When setting most of the game sections to advantageous sections as in the twelfth embodiment, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from a difference number counter) that can count the minus number of difference numbers is provided to calculate the payout rate for a predetermined period. When the ball output rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit value (the predetermined lower limit value is set higher than the lower limit value according to regulations, for example), an instruction function is activated to increase the ball output rate. Good too. Then, when the ball output rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the instruction function is terminated.
Activating the instruction function when a predetermined lower limit value is reached may be included in "AT" or may not be included in "AT". However, since the instruction function is still activated, this corresponds to processing related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the obtained number display LED 78 is used as the LED for displaying information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set to other existing LEDs, or a dedicated LED may be separately provided to display information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions.
When a separate LED is provided exclusively for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, even if the start switch 41 is operated after displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions in the game start set process, the specified number of instructions will not be displayed. It is not necessary to delete the information corresponding to . Furthermore, even if all the reels 31 are stopped, a small winning combination is won, and medals are paid out, there is no need to erase the information corresponding to the designated specified number.
In addition, when a dedicated LED is provided to display information corresponding to the specified specified number, the specified specified number will not be confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc., so the specified number can be specified in any display format. Can be done. For example, if the designated specified number is "2", it is possible to display "2".

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example was given in which the specified number “2” is specified, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the specified number “1” or “3” may be specified. Conceivable. If the specification has the possibility of specifying any of the specified numbers "1" to "3", the display of the obtained number display LED 78 when specifying the specified number "1" is set to "A1", and the specified number is set to "A1". For example, the display indicating "2" may be set as "A2", and the display indicating the specified number "3" may be set as "A3".

C. 13th Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 is set to pass through the centers of the four reels 31 and the centers of the four stop switches 42. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the four stop switches 42 may all be arranged to the right of the position shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that a part of the stop switch 42B intersects the line L1. On the contrary, all four stop switches 42 may be placed to the left of the position shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that a part of the stop switch 42C intersects the line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but the Roman numerals may be used as lamps. In this case, for example, when the next stop switch to be operated is 42C, a lamp with the Roman numeral "3" may be turned on.
Furthermore, the ranges in which the Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written are given different colors, and the stop switches 42A to 42D can also be given colors corresponding to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". Can be mentioned. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numeral "1" is white, the range of Roman numeral "2" is blue, the range of Roman numeral "3" is yellow, and the range of Roman numeral "4" is red. It will be done.

(3) Furthermore, a portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be constituted by the image display device 23. Then, as described above, each stop switch 42 is given a different color. In this case, when notifying the push order, for example, when specifying the stop switch 42B (blue), the area around the reel 31B may be illuminated in blue.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 selections of pressing orders can be provided as the pressing order bell. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a first stop push order bell. Here, in the prior art, there are three choices for the first stop pressing order bell. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to set four options. When displaying an image of the correct pressing order when the first stop pressing order bell is won, for example, if the stop switch 42 that is the correct answer is the stop switch 42C, an image of "XX1x" may be displayed.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set as the stop switch 42C, the second stop as the stop switch 42A, and the third stop and fourth stop as arbitrary (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D may be used). In this case, the correct answer pressing order can be set to 12 choices. Furthermore, when displaying the correct answer press order as an image, in the above example, "2x1x" may be displayed as an image. After the stop switch 42C is operated, an image such as "2×-×" may be displayed.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modified examples described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Additional notes>
The inventions stated in the original specification etc. of the present application (original inventions) include, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 14, which are the problems to be solved by the original invention and the problems related to the original invention, respectively. The means and effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the inventions described in this specification are not limited to the original inventions 1 to 14.

1. Original invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that does not execute processing related to gaming media after a power outage occurs.
In conventional gaming machines, by turning off the blocker before executing the backup process as a power-off process, even if medals are inserted while the backup process is being executed, the medals are returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, a technique is known in which the medal addition process is not performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if a power outage occurs at the moment a medal is inserted into the medal slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power outage process is executed, and the medal will be counted. It was possible. Note that it is not preferable in terms of control to execute medal addition processing (medal bet processing or medal credit processing) after the power is cut off.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to prevent the addition process of game media from being executed even if a power outage occurs at approximately the same time as the game media are inserted from the game media input slot. .

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 1 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (first embodiment (A)) is
a game media slot (medal slot 47);
It is provided in the path (medal path) for game media (medals) inserted from the game media input port, and is in a state where the game media are allowed to pass (on state) or a state where the game media are not allowed to pass (off state). ) a blocker (45) controllable to
Detection means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) which are provided in the path of the game medium input from the game medium input port and can detect the game medium (the detection means B is located downstream of the detection means A) ) and ,
When an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off while the blocker is controlled to allow passage of gaming media, the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and the game media is stopped. The time required to control the blocker to a state where passage is not permitted is T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
When a game medium is released from the game medium slot into the inside of the game machine while the blocker is controlled to allow passage of the game medium, the game medium cannot be seen from the front of the game machine. From when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2) until the detection means B detects the game medium and no longer detects the game medium (position M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1<T2
It is characterized by making it so that

(c) Effects of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, a power outage occurs when the gaming media is released from the gaming media slot into the gaming machine and becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine. In this case, the blocker is controlled to a state where the power supply is cut off and the passage of the game medium is not permitted until the detection means B no longer detects the game medium. , at least not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the game medium addition process (bet process or credit process) is not executed. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs when the gaming medium is no longer visible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if a power outage occurs immediately after the gaming medium is released inside the gaming machine, the game You can choose not to accept media. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game media addition process from being executed after a power outage occurs.

2. Original invention 2
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 2 The original invention relates to a gate mark on a board case in a gaming machine equipped with a board case in which a control board is housed.
2. Description of the Related Art In conventional gaming machines, a board case that houses a main control board inside is known. Here, since the board case is generally formed by molding, gate marks remain on the board case. A technique has been proposed that uses this gate trace as a landmark (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-042270).
However, since the gate mark on the board case includes a cut portion of the resin, it is unclear when viewed from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the gate remains may be opened and the inside of the main control board may be accessed.
The problem that the invention was originally intended to solve is to suppress the act of tampering that makes use of the gate marks on the board case.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 2 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (second embodiment) is
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) equipped with a calculation function,
a control board (main control board 50) on which the predetermined IC is mounted on one surface (the surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
A board case (a board case 56 consisting of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) that has a plurality of surfaces (a top surface, a side surface, etc.) and accommodates the control board;
The board case is formed so that the inside thereof is visible,
Arranging gate marks (57b) during molding of the board case on a surface that is outside the board case and faces the one surface of the control board (outside top surface of the upper cover 57);
The predetermined IC of the control board is not located in a direction perpendicular to the opposing surface from the gate trace.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, since the prescribed IC of the control board is not located in the vertical direction of the gate trace on the board case, the gate trace can be opened illegally to access the prescribed IC. This can be prevented.
Furthermore, since there are no gate marks on the board case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being obstructed by the gate marks. This makes it possible to easily visually confirm whether or not a given IC has been tampered with.

3. Original invention 3
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 3 The original invention relates to processing when communication is restored from the disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines are known in which a main control board sends commands to a sub-control board, and the sub-control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received commands.
Here, there is a known technique in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that there is an abnormality in command reception based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, Publication No. 2014-226503).
However, when transmitting commands from the main control board to the sub control board, disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when communication is restored, there is a possibility that the sub-control board will not be able to output normal effects.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to provide an appropriate effect when communication is restored after a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 3 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (third embodiment) is
a main control board (50);
a sub-control board (80) that controls the performance based on information received from the main control board;
The sub-control board is capable of receiving information about the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In a predetermined gaming state (AT), the sub-control board is capable of outputting a performance corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on receiving information about the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board is
When a predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined gaming state, when information that the predetermined stop switch has been operated is received, a predetermined stop switch corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. A performance (a performance when the reels corresponding to a predetermined stop switch are stopped) is output, and then, before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated, information from the main control board cannot be received. , after that, it became possible to receive information from the main control board in the "N+a" game, and then, in the "N+a" game, information was received that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch was operated. In this case, output a performance that corresponds to the operation of the specific stop switch and is related to the predetermined performance (a performance that follows the predetermined performance and is a performance when the reels corresponding to the specific stop switch are stopped). Then, when predetermined information is received for the "N+a+1" game number, the effect for the "N+a+1" game number is output based on the predetermined information.

(c) Effect of original invention 3 According to the original invention, when communication is restored during the "N+a" game, a performance related to the predetermined performance of the "N" game that had been output until then is output. Therefore, in the "N+a" game, the performance following the "N" game can be output. Since the normal performance is restored when the game moves to the "N+a+1" game, it is possible to prevent the performance from suddenly changing due to the restoration of communication during the "N+a" game. Thereby, it is possible to output a presentation that does not give an unnatural feeling before and after the occurrence of a disconnection.

4. Original invention 4
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 4 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which a stop switch can be operated at high speed.
In conventional gaming machines, when a stop switch is operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switch are stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to a lottery result. Further, after the reel is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor is kept in an excited state for a predetermined period of time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the on state or when the motor is in the excited state, the next operation of the stop switch is not accepted.
Here, there is a known technique that does not accept a stop operation even if a second stop switch is operated until the reel status changes to the stopped state after the first stop switch is operated ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-093576).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, if it takes a long time after the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch operation can be accepted, there is a problem that the game cannot be played at a high speed.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to enable a stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 4 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fourth embodiment) is
A reel (31) and
a motor (32) for rotating the reel;
a reel control means (65) that drives and controls the motor to stop rotation of the reel based on detection of operation of a stop button (stop button 42a);
Comprising an internal lottery means (winning lottery means 61),
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest position (the position shown in FIG. 12(c)), and when the stop button is released, the stop button is turned on. The button is configured to be movable to an initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a)) by biasing force, and the sensor is turned off before the stop button moves to the initial position,
In a game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button is operated on a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under a situation where all the reels are rotating by the reel control means, and the predetermined result is determined. After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, the predetermined reel is brought into an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) has elapsed since the excitation state was set. When this occurs, the excitation state is terminated.
When the time from the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released until the sensor turns off is T1 (T11 in FIG. 13), and the predetermined time is T2,
T1<T2
It is characterized by making it so that

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, it is assumed that the start of the motor's excitation state when the reel is stopped is the same as the moment when the stop button pressed to the deepest part is released. Sometimes the excitation state ends after the sensor is turned off. Therefore, the next operation of the stop button can be accepted at the timing when the excitation state of the motor ends.

5. Original invention 5
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 5 The original invention relates to control of a medal payout device.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor to rotate the hopper disk, but when a constant current is passed through the DC motor, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state. Then, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates from the time the hopper motor starts driving until the first medal is ejected. The time required is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, and the player may feel that the first medal ejection is delayed.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to prevent the player from feeling that the first medal is delayed in being ejected.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 5 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
A hopper (35) for storing medals,
a hopper disk (101) provided in the hopper;
a hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disk;
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality of (eight) holding parts (102) along the outer periphery of the hopper disk that can hold medals stored in the hopper,
When the hopper motor is driven and the hopper disk rotates, the medals held in the holding part are sequentially ejected from the ejection part (103),
The position of the holding section where the last ejected medal was held at the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process was ejected from the ejecting section is defined as a first position,
The position of the holding part where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting part is a second position,
When the first payout process is finished, the control means controls a state in which the holding part holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between a first position and a second position. The hopper motor is preferably driven so that the hopper disk stops rotating.

(c) Effect of original invention 5 According to the original invention, if the holding part that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the holding part that holds the first ejected medal stops between the first position and the second position. The distance is shorter than when stopped at the second position. As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when stopping at the second position, so even if the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates, the ejection of the first medal will be delayed. It is possible to avoid giving any sensation to the player.

6. Original invention 6
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 6 The original invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board attached to the inside of the cabinet and the sub-control board attached to the back surface of the front door.
Conventional game machines are known that include an electrolytic capacitor for power storage on a sub-control board for controlling effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for power storage is filled with an electrolytic solution, but if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, The main CPU may malfunction. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the main CPU will be damaged due to the impact when the electrolytic capacitor bursts.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if an electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered. Another purpose is to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by the impact even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 6 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (seventh embodiment) is
cabinet (13);
a front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be openable and closable;
a main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with a sub-control board (80) for controlling the production,
the main control board is installed inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to the back side of the front door,
The main control board and the sub-control board are arranged to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
The present invention is characterized in that an electrolytic capacitor (86) is disposed on the sub-control board at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged in a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board, the electrolytic capacitor may explode due to a malfunction and the electrolyte Even if the electrolyte is scattered, it is possible to prevent the scattered electrolyte from adhering to the main CPU, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures, the main CPU can be prevented from receiving the impact directly, thereby preventing the main CPU from being damaged.

7. Original invention 7
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to the stop control of the reels on the main control board side and the control of the output of effects on the sub control board side.
Conventional gaming machines can perform multiple types of performance contents, and each performance content can be executed when the special role has been won (internal) and when the special role has not been won (non-internal). It is known that the selection probabilities of are different (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-146608).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the performance content is selected regardless of the lottery result of the internal lottery both in the internal game and in the non-internal game.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the lottery result of the internal lottery.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 7 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (ninth embodiment) is
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols;
a plurality of stop switches (42) operated by a player when stopping each of the reels;
Main control means (main control board 50) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the production,
The main control means includes:
An internal lottery in which the drawing is conducted in such a way that there are cases where the first drawing result (for example, "BB" wins alone during a non-internal draw) or a second drawing result (for example, "non-winning" during a BB draw). means (rot lottery means 61);
a plurality of stop position determination tables defining stop positions of the reel corresponding to the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated;
reel control means (65) for determining the stop position of the reel using any of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position;
The reel control means determines the stop position of the reel using the same stop position determination table for a game that has a first drawing result and a game that has a second lottery result,
The sub-control means
A plurality of performance determination tables that define the performances to be output,
A production output control means (91) for determining a production to be output using any of the production determination tables and outputting the determined production;
The performance output control means is characterized in that the performance output control means determines the performance to be output by using different performance determination tables for the game resulting in the first lottery result and the game resulting in the second lottery result.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, the reel control means stops at the same time on the main control means side in the game in which the internal lottery means has the first drawing result and the game in which the second drawing result has occurred. The stop position of the reel is determined using the position determination table, but on the sub-control means side, the performance output control means determines the performance to be output using a different performance determination table.
Thereby, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and effects can be diversified.

8. Original invention 8
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 8 The original invention relates to the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In a conventional gaming machine, a protruding side that protrudes outward is provided at the edge of the opening on the front side of the cabinet, and the protruding side is configured to be accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. Therefore, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign objects to enter (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door may be slightly opened so that the protruding side is removed from the front door, allowing foreign objects to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to prevent unauthorized acts (goto acts) in which foreign objects enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door by opening the front door a little.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 8 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
cabinet (13);
a front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be openable and closable;
and a door sensor that detects opening of the front door,
A first closing part (13c) is provided at the lower part of the cabinet, and the first closing part (13c) projects toward the front door when the front door is closed.
A second closing part (12a) is provided at a position below the first closing part in the lower part of the front door, the second closing part (12a) protruding toward the cabinet when the front door is closed;
A third closing part (12b) is provided at a position above the first closing part in the lower part of the front door, and projects toward the cabinet when the front door is closed;
When the front door is closed, the first closing part is arranged between the second closing part and the third closing part,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects opening of the front door is defined as a detection start position,
Even when the front door is at the detection start position, the first closing part is arranged between the second closing part and the third closing part.

(c) Effect of original invention 8 According to the original invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closing part and the third closing part are connected. The first closed part will come out from between. Further, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it is possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, the first blocking part does not come out from between the second blocking part and the third blocking part before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open, and the first blocking part does not come out from between the second blocking part and the third blocking part. Since the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a curved shape even in the position where it is possible to do so, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts (goto acts) in which foreign objects enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Original invention 9
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 9 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with advantageous section indicators have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator, lighting control of the advantageous section indicator upon recovery from a power cut has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator upon recovery from a power outage.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 9 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
An advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section;
If the power supply is cut off while the advantageous section indicator is lit, and the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous section indicator is turned off after the interrupt processing is started. Enables processing to turn on the light,
After the power supply is cut off in a situation where the advantageous section indicator is lit, when the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned on, processing for turning off the advantageous section indicator; After executing the process, it is possible to proceed to the setting change process.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, it is possible to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator depending on the situation when recovering from a power-off.

10. Original invention 10
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with four reels and a stop button.
Conventional gaming machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to increase the number of reels and stop buttons to four in conventional gaming machines. However, when the number of stop buttons is set to four, there is a problem in that it is easy to make a mistake in operating the stop button during AT.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it difficult for errors in operation of the stop button to occur when the number of stop buttons is increased to four.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 10 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
Four reels (31A to 31D) and
and four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels,
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least a portion of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is located vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
It is characterized in that at least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is located vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(c) Effect of original invention 10 According to the original invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, it is possible to operate the stop buttons on both the left and right ends using the left and right ends of the operation buttons as landmarks. , it is possible to prevent mistakes in operating the stop button from occurring.

11. Original invention 11
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 11 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can specify a specified number of games.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that allow games to be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the game can be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers, there are cases where an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number occur.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to play a game with an appropriate prescribed number of players.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 11 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (12th embodiment) is
Equipped with a notification gaming state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
When informing the operation mode in the notification gaming state, information corresponding to the operation mode (press order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display section (obtained number display LED 78),
In the notification gaming state, a game can be started when at least a prescribed number of gaming values (“2” or “3”) are inputted;
In the notification gaming state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display section,
In the notification gaming state, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display section, the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed at a predetermined timing (in FIG. , displayed in step S322),
When displaying information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display section, it should be displayed in a display format that can be distinguished from the information corresponding to the operation mode (if the specified number is "2", "0A" is displayed). Features.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, information corresponding to the specified number can be displayed at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on. , it is possible to notify the appropriate prescribed number for the game.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode and the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. Original invention 12
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notification gaming state.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a counter that counts the number of different coins during AT are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
In conventional gaming machines, it is required to initialize information regarding the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends. However, after the AT ends, there are cases where the next AT wins early, and there are cases where it is desired to carry over the difference in the number of tickets from the previous AT.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to initialize the information regarding the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section, while making it possible to carry over the difference in the number of coins from the previous notification gaming state (AT).

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 12 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of gaming value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies hereinafter), and the minimum value is set to ``0''. ”, a first difference counter (difference counter) that stores the value
The second control means (sub control board 80) includes a second difference number counter (sub difference number counter) that stores a cumulative value of difference numbers indicating the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of gaming value;
At the end of the advantageous section, the first difference counter is cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or 52), but the second difference counter may not be cleared.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, since the first difference counter is cleared at the end of an advantageous section, it is possible to comply with the rule of initializing information regarding an advantageous section. In addition, there are cases where the second difference number counter is not cleared, and in that case, it becomes possible to take over the difference number of sheets from the previous notification game state at the start of the next notification game state.

13. Original invention 13
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 13 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notification gaming state.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a counter that counts the number of different coins during AT are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, sufficient consideration has not been given to how to count (update) the difference in the number of coins when winning a replay prize.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number of coins at the time of replay winning.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 13 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
a difference counter that stores the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), with the minimum value being "0";
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. At least in a game in which a small prize has been won, after all the reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ( Step S424 in FIG. 51 or 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). Enables execution of the process for ending (step S435),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the update process of the difference counter (steps S428 and W429) is executed. After that, it is determined whether the value of the difference counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (step S434), and when it is determined that the value is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" at step S434). ''), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed,
2. In a game in which the replay is won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (see FIG. 51). or step S424 in FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference counter is not determined (step S434). processing for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) without executing the processing),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the difference counter is updated without executing the update process of the difference counter. It is determined whether the value of is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if "Yes" in step S426, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section is determined. When it is determined that this is the case ("Yes" in step S434), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) is enabled.

(c) Effect of original invention 13 According to the original invention, in a game where a replay is won, the difference counter is updated regardless of whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section. Since this is not executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference in the number of coins in a game in which the replay is won. Furthermore, it is possible to speed up program processing.

14. Original invention 14
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 14 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of executing processing related to an instruction function in a predetermined number of games.
Conventionally, gaming machines having an instruction function have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the process related to the instruction function and the process related to the advantageous section according to the specified number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 14 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
a notification gaming state (AT) in which an instruction function to notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be executed;
An advantageous section in which the notification gaming state can be executed;
an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to the advantageous section;
A notification game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number of sheets counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, number of games played or difference number of sheets) related to the notification gaming state,
It has a game in which at least a first specified number (prescribed number “3”) or a second specified number (prescribed number “2”) can be inputted,
In the game (AT) in the advantageous section, in a game that is started based on the first prescribed number being input, processing related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct pressing order) can be executed (in Figure 48). , "Yes" in step S382), and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed in a game started based on the input of the second specified number ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the notification game state, in a game started based on the first specified number of inputs, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the notification game Enables counter updating (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the notification game state, in a game that is started based on the second specified number of inputs, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the notification game counter is updated. Make the update impossible (“No” in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of original invention 14 According to the original invention, by making it possible to update the advantageous section counter by playing either the first specified number or the second specified number, it is possible to optimize the advantageous section. .
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed, it is possible to maintain consistency between the execution of the process related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter. can.

10 Slot machine (gaming machine)
11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a Second closing part 12b Third closing part 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c First closing part 14 Symbol display device 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout device 21 Production lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop Button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal insertion slot 47a Medal guard part 47b Medal placement part 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a Screw hole 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 Board case (main board case)
57 Upper cover 57a Caulked portion 57b Gate trace 57c Recessed portion 57d Protrusion 57e Protrusion 58 Lower cover 58a Caulked portion 58b Gate trace 58c Boss 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Obtained number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Loading display LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
86 Electrolytic capacitor 87 Sub board case 91 Production output control means 101 Hopper disk 102 Holding section 103 Discharge section 110 Reel base 120 Reel control board 121 Reel board case

Claims (1)

A game media input port;
Detection means A, detection means B, and detection means C are provided in a passage through which game media input from the game medium input port pass, and are capable of detecting game media (detection means B is located downstream of detection means A). , and the detection means C is located downstream from the detection means B),
A detecting means is movable between a position where the passage of the game medium is permitted and a position where the passage of the game medium is not permitted, and is provided in a passage through which the game medium input from the game medium input port passes. a blocker located downstream from A and upstream from detection means B;
As a game section, it has a first section and a second section,
In the first section, the predetermined gaming state is not reached,
In the second section, there may be a predetermined gaming state,
A predetermined storage means capable of storing a value related to the number of games played in the second section and a value related to the total number of differences in the second section,
In a predetermined game in the second section, the value related to the number of games stored in the predetermined storage means can be updated based on the execution of the game, and the number of games stored in the predetermined storage means is made based on the execution of the game. after updating the value related to the total difference stored in the predetermined storage means based on the number of game media awarded in a predetermined game and the number of bets on the game media in the predetermined game,
If the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed in a specific game in the second section, whether or not the value related to the number of games in the second section stored in the updated predetermined storage means satisfies the first specific condition. If the first specific condition is satisfied, the value related to the total number of differences in the second section is not judged as to whether it satisfies the second specific condition, but is stored in the updated predetermined storage means. If the value related to the number of games played in the second section does not satisfy the first specific condition, the value related to the total number of differences stored in the predetermined storage means is not updated, but the value related to the total number of differences in the second section is not updated. A judgment is made as to whether or not the second specific condition is met;
If the value related to the number of games played in the second section satisfies the first specific condition, the second section can be terminated, and if the value related to the total number of differences in the second section satisfies the second specific condition, the second section is terminated. possible,
When an event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, the power cutoff process can be executed.
In the power-off process, a process is executed to set the blocker to a position where passage of the game medium is not permitted, and after executing the process, other processes including a checksum calculation process are executed,
In a situation where the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value less than the upper limit of the number of credits), when gaming media is inserted from the gaming media slot, the game When the detection status of the detection means B and the detection means C for the medium satisfies a predetermined condition, "1" can be added to the number of credits,
When the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value less than the upper limit of the number of credits), when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off, the power supply Designing the period until detecting an event in which the supply is cut off, executing processing to set the blocker to a position where passage of gaming media is not permitted through power-off processing, and disallowing passage of gaming media. Let the value be T1,
In a situation where the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value less than the upper limit of the number of credits), when gaming media is inserted from the gaming media slot, the game The design value of the period from the time when the medium reaches the position where it is detected by the detection means A until the time when the said game medium reaches the position where it is detected by the detection means B is set as T2 ,
In a situation where the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is a predetermined value (the predetermined value is a value less than the upper limit of the number of credits), when gaming media is inserted from the gaming media slot, the game The period from the time when the detection means B detects the medium to the time after the detection means C detects the game medium and the time when the detection means B no longer detects the game medium and the time when the detection means C no longer detects the game medium. When the design value is T3,
T1<T2
T1<T3
A gaming machine that is.

Images